Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e manuel d'utilisation
- Voir en ligne ou télécharger le manuel d’utilisation
- 1044 pages
- 24.99 mb
Aller à la page of
Les manuels d’utilisation similaires
-
All in One Printer
Ricoh Aficio MP C2000
206 pages 7.04 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh SP 3500SF
476 pages 4.9 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh Priport DX 4542
2 pages 0.44 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh DSm622
184 pages 5.14 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh Aficio SP 1200SF
4 pages 0.46 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh 3045AD
136 pages 4.43 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh LD116
128 pages 2.82 mb -
All in One Printer
Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515
1171 pages 27.98 mb
Un bon manuel d’utilisation
Les règles imposent au revendeur l'obligation de fournir à l'acheteur, avec des marchandises, le manuel d’utilisation Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e. Le manque du manuel d’utilisation ou les informations incorrectes fournies au consommateur sont à la base d'une plainte pour non-conformité du dispositif avec le contrat. Conformément à la loi, l’inclusion du manuel d’utilisation sous une forme autre que le papier est autorisée, ce qui est souvent utilisé récemment, en incluant la forme graphique ou électronique du manuel Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e ou les vidéos d'instruction pour les utilisateurs. La condition est son caractère lisible et compréhensible.
Qu'est ce que le manuel d’utilisation?
Le mot vient du latin "Instructio", à savoir organiser. Ainsi, le manuel d’utilisation Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e décrit les étapes de la procédure. Le but du manuel d’utilisation est d’instruire, de faciliter le démarrage, l'utilisation de l'équipement ou l'exécution des actions spécifiques. Le manuel d’utilisation est une collection d'informations sur l'objet/service, une indice.
Malheureusement, peu d'utilisateurs prennent le temps de lire le manuel d’utilisation, et un bon manuel permet non seulement d’apprendre à connaître un certain nombre de fonctionnalités supplémentaires du dispositif acheté, mais aussi éviter la majorité des défaillances.
Donc, ce qui devrait contenir le manuel parfait?
Tout d'abord, le manuel d’utilisation Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e devrait contenir:
- informations sur les caractéristiques techniques du dispositif Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e
- nom du fabricant et année de fabrication Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e
- instructions d'utilisation, de réglage et d’entretien de l'équipement Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e
- signes de sécurité et attestations confirmant la conformité avec les normes pertinentes
Pourquoi nous ne lisons pas les manuels d’utilisation?
Habituellement, cela est dû au manque de temps et de certitude quant à la fonctionnalité spécifique de l'équipement acheté. Malheureusement, la connexion et le démarrage Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e ne suffisent pas. Le manuel d’utilisation contient un certain nombre de lignes directrices concernant les fonctionnalités spécifiques, la sécurité, les méthodes d'entretien (même les moyens qui doivent être utilisés), les défauts possibles Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e et les moyens de résoudre des problèmes communs lors de l'utilisation. Enfin, le manuel contient les coordonnées du service Ricoh en l'absence de l'efficacité des solutions proposées. Actuellement, les manuels d’utilisation sous la forme d'animations intéressantes et de vidéos pédagogiques qui sont meilleurs que la brochure, sont très populaires. Ce type de manuel permet à l'utilisateur de voir toute la vidéo d'instruction sans sauter les spécifications et les descriptions techniques compliquées Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e, comme c’est le cas pour la version papier.
Pourquoi lire le manuel d’utilisation?
Tout d'abord, il contient la réponse sur la structure, les possibilités du dispositif Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e, l'utilisation de divers accessoires et une gamme d'informations pour profiter pleinement de toutes les fonctionnalités et commodités.
Après un achat réussi de l’équipement/dispositif, prenez un moment pour vous familiariser avec toutes les parties du manuel d'utilisation Ricoh 4035e/DSm635/LD135 AG/Aficio 2035e. À l'heure actuelle, ils sont soigneusement préparés et traduits pour qu'ils soient non seulement compréhensibles pour les utilisateurs, mais pour qu’ils remplissent leur fonction de base de l'information et d’aide.
Table des matières du manuel d’utilisation
-
Page 1
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide For safe and correct use of this machi ne, please be sure to read the Safety Informatio n in this manual before you use it. Getting Started Combined Functio n Oper ations Document Server User Tools (System Settings) Troubleshooting Remarks Entering Text Security Specifications[...]
-
Page 2
2035e/2045e Operating Instruct ions General Settings Guide RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan Phone: +81-3-3479-3111 Overseas Affiliates U.S.A. RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 Phone: +1-973-8 82-2000 The Netherlands RICOH EUROPE B.V. Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amste lveen [...]
-
Page 3
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy pla ce near the machine. Important Contents of this manual [...]
-
Page 4
Declaration of Conformity “The Product complies wi th the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending di- rectives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.” In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the fol lowing symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. c means STAND BY. Copyright[...]
-
Page 5
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy pla ce near the machine. Important Contents of this manual [...]
-
Page 6
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy pla ce near the machine. Important Contents of this manual [...]
-
Page 7
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy pla ce near the machine. Important Contents of this manual [...]
-
Page 8
Declaration of Conformity “The Product complies wi th the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending di- rectives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.” In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the fol lowing symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. c means STAND BY. Copyright[...]
-
Page 9
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy pla ce near the machine. Important Contents of this manual [...]
-
Page 10
Declaration of Conformity “The Product complies wi th the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending di- rectives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amen ding directives.” In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the fol lowing symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. c means STAND BY. M 010 .e[...]
-
Page 11
i Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note r Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. r Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssa ry to view the man ua l s as a PDF file. r Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 "Oper[...]
-
Page 12
ii v Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility incl uded on the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner Driver & Document Ma nagement Utilities". • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displa[...]
-
Page 13
iii What You Can Do with This Machine The following introduces the functio ns of this machine, and the rel evant manu- als containing detailed information about them. Products marked with * are optional. For details about opti onal products, see p.18 “Options”, or contact your local dealer. Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions This[...]
-
Page 14
iv Paperless Fax Transmission and Reception Reception • You can store received fax messag- es on the machine's hard disk, in- stead of printing them onto paper. You can use DeskTopBinder V2 Professional*/Lite or a Web browser to check, print, delete, re- trieve, or download documents us- ing your computer (Storing received documents). See Fa[...]
-
Page 15
v • With SccanRouter V2 Profession- al*/Lite, you can sa ve scan files in specified destinations on network computers (Using the networ k de- livery scanner function). See Scan- ner Reference . • You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan file by Scan to Folder). See Scanner Reference . Administrating the Machine/ Protecting Docu[...]
-
Page 16
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ........................................ i What You Can Do with This Machine ............................................................ ...... iii Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functi ons ................ ............................ ....... iii[...]
-
Page 17
vii 3. Document Server Relationship between the Document Server and Other Functions................. 33 Document Server Display ............... .............. ................ .............. .............. ............... 34 Using the Document Server ..................................................... ........................... 35 Storing Data .[...]
-
Page 18
viii Registering Destinations to a Group ...................................... ........................... 95 Registering a New Group .................. .............. ................. .............. ................. ......... 95 Registering Destinations to a Group ............... ................. .............. ................. ......... 96 R[...]
-
Page 19
ix Maintaining Your Machine ....................................................... ......................... 143 Cleaning the Exposure Glass........................ .............. ................ .............. ............. 143 Cleaning the Exposure Glass Cover .......... ................. .............. ................ ............. 143 Cleani[...]
-
Page 20
x[...]
-
Page 21
1 Notice Notice To Wireless LAN Inte rface (optional) Users Notice to Users in EEA Countries This product complies with the essentia l requirements and provisions of Direc- tive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications termin al equipment and the mu- tual recognition of their [...]
-
Page 22
2 Copyrights and Trademarks Trademarks Microsoft ® , Windows ® and Windows NT ® are registered trademarks of Micro- soft Corpora tion in the Unit ed States an d/or other countries . Acrobat ® is a registered tradema rk of Adobe System s Incorporated. Bluetooth™ is a trademark of the Blueto oth SIG, Inc. (Speci al Interest Group) and is used b[...]
-
Page 23
3 • The product manufacturer provide s wa rranty and suppor t to the software of the product inclu ding the expat, and th e product manufactu r er makes the in- itial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligat ions. • Information relating to the expat is available at: http://expat.sourceforge.net/ Copyright (c) 1998, 1[...]
-
Page 24
4 C All advertising materials mentioning fe a t u r e s o r u s e o f t h i s s o f t w a r e m u s t display the followin g acknowledgment: This product includes software deve loped by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. D Neither the name of Th e NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contribu- tors may be used to endorse or promote[...]
-
Page 25
5 The following notices are required to sa tisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentione d in this document: • This product include s software develo ped by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. • This product includes so ftware developed by Jonathan R. Stone fo r the NetB- SD Project. •T h i s p r o d u[...]
-
Page 26
6 SASL CMU libsasl Tim Martin Rob Earhart Rob Siemborski Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserve d. Redistribution and use in source and bi nary forms, with or without modifica- tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: A Redistributions of source co de must retain the above copyrig ht notice, thi[...]
-
Page 27
7 License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message- Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioni ng or re ferencing the derived work. RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no repr esentations concerning either the mer- chantability of this softw[...]
-
Page 28
8 How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially h azardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine withou t following the in - structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de- scribed i[...]
-
Page 29
9 Safety Information When using this machine, the following sa fety precautions should always be fol- lowed. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols are us ed: R WARNING: R WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, co uld result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION[...]
-
Page 30
10 R CAUTION: • Protect the mach ine from dampne ss or wet weathe r, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, you sh ould take care that the power cord will not be damaged und er the machine. • When you disconn ect the power pl ug from the wall outlet , a lways [...]
-
Page 31
11 Positions of R WARNING and R CAUTION labels This machine has labels for R WARNING and R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please follo w the instructi ons and handle th e machine as indicated.[...]
-
Page 32
12 ENERGY STAR Program v Low-Power mode and Of f mode or Sleep mode This product automatically l owers its power consumpti on when it is not op- erated for a fixed time (standard setti n g time: 1 minute). This is called “Off mode” on a single function copying ma chine, and “Sleep mode” on a multiple function machine equipped with optional [...]
-
Page 33
13 v Duplex Priority The ENERGY STAR Program recommends the duplex function. By conserv- ing paper resources this function is le ss of a burden to the environment. For applicable machines , duplex function (one-sided origin als → two-sided cop- ies) can be selected prefer entially when the operatio n switch or the main pow- er switch is turned on[...]
-
Page 34
14 Machine Types This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To ascertain which model you have, see the inside front cover. Type 1 Type 2 Copy speed 35 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K ) 45 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K )[...]
-
Page 35
15 1. Getting Started Guide to Components 1. Exposure glass cover (optional) or Auto Document Feeder (ADF) (op- tional) See p.18 “External Options”. (The illustration shows the ADF.) 2. Exposure glass Place originals face down here for copy- ing. 3. Internal tray Copied, printed paper or fax messages are delivered here. 4. Main power switch If [...]
-
Page 36
Getting Started 16 1 9. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) (option- al) The indicator lights when paper is deliv- ered to internal tray 2 (1 bin tray). If inter- nal tray 2 has not been installed, the indicator does not light. See p.18 “Exter- nal Options”. 10. Duplex unit (unit for two-sided copies) Allows you to print on both sides of a piece paper[...]
-
Page 37
Guide to Components 17 1 1. Ventilation holes Prevent overheating. Do not obstruct the ventilation holes by placing objects near them or leanin g things against the m. If the machine overheats, a fault might oc- cur.[...]
-
Page 38
Getting Started 18 1 Options External Options 1. 1000-sheet finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples copies. *1: Finisher upper tray *2: Finisher shift tray 2. Exposure glass cover Lower over originals for copying. 3. Auto Document Feeder Place stacks of orig inals he re. They will feed in automatically. 4. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) If you select thi[...]
-
Page 39
Options 19 1 Internal Options A Fax unit Allows you to use the facsimile function. B Printer/Scanner unit Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions. C User account enhance unit Allows you to increase memor y for storing user codes. D File format converter Allows you to download document s stored using the copier and printer func- tions fr[...]
-
Page 40
Getting Started 20 1 Control Panel This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully in- stalled. 1. Screen contrast knob Adjusts display panel brightne ss. 2. Indicators Show errors and machine status. • d : Add Staple indicator. See p.129 “ d Adding Staples”. • D : Add Toner indicator. See p.113 “ D Adding Tone[...]
-
Page 41
Control Panel 21 1 9. { Interrupt } key (copier/ scanner mode) Press to make interrupt copies during copying or scanning. See “Interrupt Copy”, Copy Reference . 10. Main power indicator and On indicator The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch. The On indicator lights when the power is on. Important r Do not turn [...]
-
Page 42
Getting Started 22 1 Display Panel The display panel shows machine status , error messages, and function menus. Important r A force or impact of more than 30 N (a bout 3 kgf) will damage the display panel. Note r The following display is of a machine wi th the optional 2 Tray fi nisher and LCT installed. The copying screen is displayed as default a[...]
-
Page 43
Turning On the Power 23 1 Turning On the Power This machine has two po wer switch- es. v Operation switch (r ight side of the control panel) Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up, you can make copies. v Main power switch (l eft side of the ma- chine) Turning off th is switch makes th e main power indicator on the r[...]
-
Page 44
Getting Started 24 1 Turning On the Power A Press the operation switch. The On indicator goes on . Note r If the power does not come on when the operation switch is pressed, check the main power switch is on. If it is off, turn it on. Turning Off the Power A Make sure the exposure glass cov- er or the ADF is in the right posi- tion. B Press the ope[...]
-
Page 45
Turning On the Power 25 1 - When the fax unit (optional) is installed When the main power switch is turned off while using the fax func- tion, waiting fax and print jobs may be canceled, and incoming fax docu- ments not received. If you have to turn off this sw itch for some reason, keep the following points in mind: Important r Make sure 100% is s[...]
-
Page 46
Getting Started 26 1 • When the " Add Toner " message appears • When toner is being replen- ished • When the User Tools/Coun- ter/Inquiry screen is displayed • When fixed warm-up is in progress • When the facsimile, printer, or other functions ar e active • When operations were sus- pended during printing • When the On-hook [...]
-
Page 47
27 2. Combined Function Operations Changing Modes Note r You cannot switch modes in an y of the following situations: • When scanning in a fax message for transmission • During immediate transmission • When accessing User Tools • During interrupt copying • During On hook dialing for fax transmission • While scanning an original r The co[...]
-
Page 48
Combined Function Operations 28 2 - System Reset The machine returns automatically to its initial condition when the job is fin- ished, after a certain period of time has ela psed. This function is called "System Reset". Note r You can change the System Reset time. See p.58 “Syste m Auto Reset Timer”.[...]
-
Page 49
Multi-Access 29 2 Multi-Access You can carry out another job using a diff erent function while the current job i s being performed. Performing multiple functi ons simultaneously like this is called "Multi-accessing". This allows you to handle jobs eff icientl y, regardless of how the machine is being used. For example: • While making co[...]
-
Page 50
Combined Function Operations 30 2 - Function compatibility The chart shows function compatibility when print priority is set to "Interleave". See p.51 “Print Priority”. | : Simultaneous operations are possible. $ : Operation is enabled when the releva nt function key is pressed an d remote switching (of the scanner) is done. m : Opera[...]
-
Page 51
Multi-Access 31 2 Facsimile Using the control panel $$$ mm ×× | × ||||| $$$$$$ || m Transmis sion Scanning an Original for Memory Tr ansm ission ××××××× | × ||||| ×××××× || m Memory Transmiss ion |||||||| *3 | *3 | *3 | *7 |||||||||| → m Immediate Transmis sion ××××××× | *3 × | *3 |||| ×× ×××× | → m Reception Memo[...]
-
Page 52
Combined Function Operations 32 2 *1 Simultaneous operations are only possible once the preceding job documents are all scanned and [ Next Job ] appears. *2 You can scan a document once the preceding job documents are all scan ned. *3 Simultaneous operations are only possibl e with an addition al line installed and when the fax function is not usin[...]
-
Page 53
33 3. Document Server Relationship between the Document Server and Other Functions The following table describes the rela tionship between the Document Server and other functions. *1 You can send stored documents using the fax function. See “Sending a Stored File”, Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> . *2 You can display stored docume[...]
-
Page 54
Document Server 34 3 Document Server Display v Document Server Main Display 1. Operating status and messages. 2. The title of the currently select ed screen. 3. The numbers of originals, copies, and printed pages. 4. The operation keys. 5. The functions under which the documents were stored. The icons below sho w the functions active when the docum[...]
-
Page 55
Using the Document Server 35 3 Using the Document Server Storing Data v File name Stored documents are automatically named "COPY0001", "COPY0002". You can change assig ned file names. v User name You can register a user n ame to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign it, you can register the user na[...]
-
Page 56
Document Server 36 3 D Place originals either on the expo- sure glass or in the ADF. Reference For information about types of originals and how to place them, see Copy Reference . E Make any required settings. Reference For details, see Copy Reference . F Press the { Start } key. The document is stored in the Doc- ument Server. Note r To stop scann[...]
-
Page 57
Using the Document Server 37 3 When using an unregistered user name in the Address Book A To enter an unregistered user name, press [ Non-programmed Name ] . B Enter a new user name, and then press [ OK ] . Reference p.147 “Entering Text” When no user name has been registered in the Address Book A Enter a new user name, and then press [ OK ] . [...]
-
Page 58
Document Server 38 3 Changing Stored Document's File Name, User Name, or Password A Press the { Document Server } key. B Select the document with the user name, file name, or password you want to change. Note r If a password is already se t for the document, enter that pass- word, and then press [ OK ] . C Press [ File Mana g e men t ] . D Pre[...]
-
Page 59
Using the Document Server 39 3 C To print multiple documents, re- peat step B in the order you want to print. Note r You can select up to 30 docu- ments. r If the sizes or resolution of se- lected documents are not the same, it may not be possible to print them. r If you want to change the print- ing order, cancel the selection, and select document[...]
-
Page 60
Document Server 40 3 Reference p.147 “Entering Text”. Note r To display all files stored in the Document Server, press [ File List ] . To search by user name A Press the { Document Server } key. B Press [ Sear c h by U ser N a m e ] . C To specify a registered user name, select the user name from the dis- played list, and then press [ OK ] . No[...]
-
Page 61
Using the Document Server 41 3 r Print setting item s are listed be- low. For details about print re- sults of each setting, see Copy Reference . v Binding format • Two-sided Copy Top to Top • Two-sided Copy Top to Bottom •B o o k l e t • Magazine v Cover handling • Cover/Slip sheet • Edit/Stamp v Finish •S o r t •S t a c k •S t a[...]
-
Page 62
Document Server 42 3 Sample copy If you print multiple sets using the Sort function, you can check the print order or print settings are correct by printing only the first set using the { Sample Copy } key. Limitation r This functi on can only be used when the Sort function is selected. A Select the document. Note r If a password is already se t fo[...]
-
Page 63
Using the Document Server 43 3 Deleting Stored Documents Important r You can store up to 3,000 docu- ments in the Document Server. No more documents can be stored when the total is 3,000. You should delete unnecessary documents to increase available memory. Note r You can delete a ll the stored docu- ments at once with User To ol s. See p.65 “Del[...]
-
Page 64
Document Server 44 3 Downloading Stored Documents Note r File format converter is required when downloading documents stored in copier or printer mode. A Start a Web browser. B Enter “http:// (IP address of this machine) /” in the [ Address ] box. The top page appears on the Web browser. C Click [ Document Server ] . The [ Document Server File [...]
-
Page 65
Settings for the Document Server 45 3 Settings for the Document Server v Copier/Document Server Features (See "General Features 4/4", Copy Refer- ence .) v System Settings (See p.51 “General Features”, p.55 “T ray Paper Settings”, p.58 “Timer Settings”, and p. 59 “Key Operator Tools”.) Items Default General Features Docume[...]
-
Page 66
Document Server 46 3[...]
-
Page 67
47 4. User Tools (System Settings) User Tools Menu (System Settings) Reference For details about Interface Settings an d File Transfer, see “User Tools Menu (System Settings)”, Network Guide . For details about paralle l interface, see “System Settings (Parallel Connec- tion)”, Prin ter Reference 2 . v General Features (See p. 51 “General[...]
-
Page 68
User Tools (System Settings) 48 4 v Tray Paper Settings (See p. 55 “Tray Paper Settings”.) v Timer Settings (See p. 58 “Timer Settings”.) v Interface Settings • For details about n etwork settings , see “User Tools Menu (System Set- tings)”, Network Guide . • For details about parallel interface, see “System Settings (Parallel Con[...]
-
Page 69
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 49 4 v Key Operator Tools (See p.59 “Key Operator Tools”.) Default User Code Management Copier OFF Document Server OFF Facsimile OFF Scanner OFF Printer Auto Program Key Counter Management All OFF External Charge Unit Ma nagement -- Key Operator Cod e OFF Extended Security Off Display/Print Counter -- Display/C[...]
-
Page 70
User Tools (System Settings) 50 4 Accessing User Tools (System Settings) This section is for key operators in charge of this machine. User Tools allo w you t o change or set defaults. Note r Operations for system settings dif- fer from normal operations. Al- ways quit User Tools when you have finished. See p.50 “Quitting User Tools”. r Any chan[...]
-
Page 71
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 51 4 Settings You Can Change with User Tools Reference To access User To o ls, see p.50 “Acce ssing User Tools (System Settings)”. General Features v Panel Tone The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed. Note r Default: ON v Warm Up Notice (copier/Document Server) You can have the beeper sound wh[...]
-
Page 72
User Tools (System Settings) 52 4 r When the optional internal tray 2, 1000-sheet finisher, 2 Tray finisher or booklet finisher is installed on the machine, you can speci fy an output tray for documents delivery. For details about h ow to specify an output tray for each function, see the following secti ons: • p.53 “Output: Copier (copier)” ?[...]
-
Page 73
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 53 4 v Output: Copier (copier) You can specify a tray to wh ich documents are delivered. 1. Finisher Upper Tray 2. Finisher Shift Tray 3. Finisher Shift Tray 1 4. Finisher Shift Tray 2 5. Finisher Upper Tray 6. Finisher Shift Tray 7. Internal Tray 1 8. Internal Tray 2 Note r Default: Internal Tray 1 v Output:[...]
-
Page 74
User Tools (System Settings) 54 4 v Output: Printer (printer) You can specify a tray to wh ich documents are delivered. Note r Default: Internal Tray 1 r The output trays set on the printer driv er have priority over the output tray specified above. r For details abou t output tray s, see p.53 “Out put: Copier (copier)”. v Prepare Stapling When[...]
-
Page 75
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 55 4 Tray Paper Settings v Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier/Document Server) You can specify the tray to supply paper for output. Note r Default: Tray 1 v Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile (facsimile) You can specify the tray to supply paper for output. Note r Default: Tray 1 v Paper Tray Priority: Printer (p[...]
-
Page 76
User Tools (System Settings) 56 4 Reference p.126 “Changing the Paper Size” v Paper Type: Bypass tray Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray. • The paper types you can set for the bypass tray are as follows: • recycled paper, special paper, colour paper, letterhead, label paper, pre- punched paper, b[...]
-
Page 77
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 57 4 v Paper Type: LCT Sets the display so you can see what ty pe of paper is loaded in the LCT. • The paper types you can set are as follows: • recycled paper, special paper, colour paper, letterhead, preprinted pa- per, prepunched paper, bond paper, cardstock Note r Default: • Paper Type: No Display ?[...]
-
Page 78
User Tools (System Settings) 58 4 Reference "Slip Sheets", Copy Reference Timer Settings v Auto Off Timer After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine automatically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is calle d "Auto Off". The machine status after the Au to Off o peration is refer[...]
-
Page 79
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 59 4 v Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile) Specifies the time to elapse before the facsimile mode resets. Note r Default: 30 seconds r The time can be set from 30 to 999 seconds, using the number keys. v Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner) Specifies the time to elapse before the scan ner fu nction resets. N[...]
-
Page 80
User Tools (System Settings) 60 4 v Key Counter Management Use the key counter t o specify whet her users ar e restricted or not. Note r Default: Copier/OFF, Doc ument Server/ OFF, Facsimile/OFF, Scanner/OFF, Printer/OFF v External Charge Unit Management Use the external charge unit to manage usage charges. Note r Default: Copier/OFF, Doc ument Ser[...]
-
Page 81
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 61 4 v Display/Print Counter Allows you to view and print the number of prints. • Display/Print Counter Displays the number of prints for ea ch function (Total, Copier, Fa csimile, Printer, A3/DLT, Duplex, and Staple). •P r i n t C o u n t e r L i s t Prints out a list of the number of prints made under e[...]
-
Page 82
User Tools (System Settings) 62 4 v Print Address Book: Destination List You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book. •P r i n t i n T i t l e 1 O r d e r Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order. •P r i n t i n T i t l e 2 O r d e r Prints the Address Book in Title 2 order. •P r i n t i n T i t l e 3 O r d e r Prints th[...]
-
Page 83
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 63 4 v Address Book: Program/ Change/Delete Group You can regist e r multiple user s in a group. This allows you to ea sily control registered users in each group. For details about op erations, see p.95 “Registerin g De stin ations to a Grou p”. • [ Program/Change ] This registers new groups, or change[...]
-
Page 84
User Tools (System Settings) 64 4 E Press the user (destination) key you wan t to move. Note r You can select a user using the number keys. F Press the us e r (d e s tination) key that is in the p l ace you want to move to. The user (destination) moves to the selected place, and the other users' keys will shift also. Note r You can select a us[...]
-
Page 85
Settings You Can Change with User Tools 65 4 F Enter the new name, and then press [ OK ] . G Press [ Exit ] . v Address Book: Select Title Specifies the title to select a user. Note r Default: Title 1 v Auto Delete File Specifies whether documents stored in th e Document Server are to be deleted or not after a specified period of time elapses. Note[...]
-
Page 86
User Tools (System Settings) 66 4 v AOF (Always ON) Specify whether or no t to use Auto Off. Note r Default: ON v Program/Change LDAP Server Programming an LDAP server allows yo u t o l o o k u p e - m a il destinations from the LDAP server Address Book directly. This function is available when you send scan files by e-mail in scanner mode. You can[...]
-
Page 87
Address Book 67 4 Address Book Registerin g user inf ormation , such as fax number and e-mail address, in the Address Book allows you to manage them together. Important r Address Book data is stored on the h a r d d i s k . I t c a n b e l o s t i f t h e r e i s some kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be respon- sible for any da[...]
-
Page 88
User Tools (System Settings) 68 4 5. Fax Dest. Reference p.68 “When using the fax func- tion” 6. E-mail Reference p.68 “When using the fax func- tion” p.69 “When using the scanner function” p.69 “Registering Sender Infor- mation” 7. Folder Reference p.69 “When using the scanner function” •S M B •F T P Registering Destination[...]
-
Page 89
Address Book 69 4 v When using the scanner function •E - m a i l Register e-mail addresses in the Address Book. To send a scan file by e-mail, select the destina- tion key as it appears on the ini- tial scanner function display, so you can specify the e-mail ad- dress. Reference p.82 “E-mail Destination” •F o l d e r Register the path name,[...]
-
Page 90
User Tools (System Settings) 70 4 User Code Register user codes to restrict the fol- lowing functions to certain use rs, and check their use of each function: •C o p i e r • Document Server • Facsimile •S c a n n e r •P r i n t e r Note r T h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s m a d e o f d o c - uments using the fax function stored in the Doc[...]
-
Page 91
User Code 71 4 B Enter the user name or key dis- play, and then press [ OK ] . Note r You can use the same user name as that assigned to the documents using the Docu- ment Server function. For this, the user code is not ne c- essary. See p.33 “Document Server”. Reference p.147 “Entering Text” To select the title A Press the key for the clas[...]
-
Page 92
User Tools (System Settings) 72 4 Changing a User Code Note r Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . E Select the registered user code you want to ch[...]
-
Page 93
User Code 73 4 Deleting a User Code Important r This operation also deletes user codes registered to multiple func- tions. User control via the deleted user code is disabled. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . To del[...]
-
Page 94
User Tools (System Settings) 74 4 Printing the Number of Prints for Each User Code You can print out the number of prints made under each user code us- ing [ Print Counter ] , [ Transmission Coun- ter ] or [ Scanner Counter ] . To print the number of prints made under each user code A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings [...]
-
Page 95
User Code 75 4 Clearing the Number of Prints A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] . D Press [ Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code ] . E Select the user code to clear. To clear the number of prints made under a user code A Select the user code from the left side of the display. No[...]
-
Page 96
User Tools (System Settings) 76 4 Fax Destination Register a fax dest ination so you do not need to enter fax numbers each time, and can send documents scanned in using the fax function. • It is easy to select the fax destina- tion if you register a “ User (Desti- nation) Name” and “Key Display” for the fax destination. •Y o u c a n r e[...]
-
Page 97
Fax Destination 77 4 Registering a Fax Destination A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . E Press [ New Program ] . Note r To register a fax destination to a registered user, press the user (destination) key, or enter th[...]
-
Page 98
User Tools (System Settings) 78 4 H Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [ OK ] . To select the line A Press [ Select Line ] . B Select the line, and then press [ OK ] . To program the SUB Code A Press [ Adv. Features ] , and then select [ SUB Code ] . B Press [ Change ] under TX SUB Code. C Enter a SUB Code using the number k[...]
-
Page 99
Fax Destination 79 4 D Select a standard message to print on the second line. T o stamp a customized message, press [ Custom Message ] . E Enter a message, and then press [ OK ] . Reference p.147 “Entering Text” F Press [ OK ] . G Press [ Change ] under Line 3. H Select a standard message, and then press [ OK ] . I Press [ OK ] . I Press [ OK ][...]
-
Page 100
User Tools (System Settings) 80 4 To change the SUB Code A Press [ Adv. Features ] . B Press [ Change ] under TX SUB Code. C Enter the new SUB Code, and then press [ OK ] . D To change the password, press [ Change ] under Password (SID). E Enter the new password, and then press [ OK ] . F Press [ OK ] . To change the SEP Code A Press [ Adv. Feature[...]
-
Page 101
Fax Destination 81 4 Deleting a Registered Fax Destination Note r If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its registered Personal B o x , f o r e x a m p l e , c a n n o t b e d e l i v - ered. Be sure to check the settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations. A Press the { User Tools/Count[...]
-
Page 102
User Tools (System Settings) 82 4 E-mail Destination Register e-mail destination s so you do not need to enter e-mail address every time, and can send scan files by e-mail, or send fax documents by In- ternet Fax. • It is easy to select the e-mail desti- nation if you register “Use r (Desti- nation) Name” and “Key Display” for the e-mail [...]
-
Page 103
E-mail Destination 83 4 B Enter the user (destination) name or key display, and then press [ OK ] . Note r You can use the user name when selecting an address to send an e-mail to. r You can register the user code after the user name. F or details, see p.70 “User Code”. Reference p.147 “Entering Text” To select the title A To associate a us[...]
-
Page 104
User Tools (System Settings) 84 4 Changing a Registered E-mail Destination A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . E Select the registered e-mail ad- dress user you want to change. Press the user (destination) key, or ent[...]
-
Page 105
Registering Folders 85 4 Registering Folders By registering a shared fol der, you can send scan file s to it directly. There are two types of protoco l you can use: •S M B For sending files to shared Win- dows folders •F T P For uploading files to an FTP sever Note r For details about protoco ls, server names, and folder levels, ask your networ[...]
-
Page 106
User Tools (System Settings) 86 4 F Set the user's information. Note r To register a folder to a regis- tered user, proceed to step G . To register the user (destination) name and key display A Press [ Change ] under User (Destination) Name or Key Display. The user (destination) name or key display entry display ap- pears. B Enter the user (de[...]
-
Page 107
Registering Folders 87 4 C Press [ OK ] . Note r If the fo rmat o f the en tered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [ Exit ] , and then enter the path again. D Press [ Change ] under User Name. E Enter the user name, and then press [ OK ] . Note r This is a user name which is authorized to access the fol d- er. F Press [ Change ] under P[...]
-
Page 108
User Tools (System Settings) 88 4 Changing a registered SMB folder A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . E Select the user of the registered folder you want to change. Press the user (destination) key, or enter the regi[...]
-
Page 109
Registering Folders 89 4 Deleting a registered SMB folder A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Management ] . To delete only the registered folder A Select a user of the folder you want to delete. Press the user (destination) key, or[...]
-
Page 110
User Tools (System Settings) 90 4 F Set the user's information. Note r To register a folder to a regis- tered user, proceed to step G . To register the user (destination) name and key display A Press [ Change ] under User (Destination) Name or Key Display. The user (destination) name or key display entry display ap- pears. B Enter the user (de[...]
-
Page 111
Registering Folders 91 4 M Press [ OK ] . Note r To change the port number, press [ Change ] under Port No.. Enter the p ort number using the number keys, and then press [ # ] . You can enter 1 to 65535. N Press [ Change ] under User Name. O Enter the user name, and then press [ OK ] . Note r This is a use r name which is a u- thorized to access th[...]
-
Page 112
User Tools (System Settings) 92 4 F Enter the new user name, and then press [ OK ] . This is a user name which is a u- thorized to access the folde r. G Press [ Change ] under Password. H Enter the new password, and then press [ OK ] . Note r To change the port number, press [ Change ] under Port No.. Enter the new port number using the number keys[...]
-
Page 113
Registering a Protection Code 93 4 Registering a Protection Code You can stop sender's names or fold- ers being accessed by setting a protec- tion code. You can use this function to protect the following: •F o l d e r s You can prev ent unauthorize d ac- cess to folders. • Sender's names (when sending e- mails) You can prevent misuse [...]
-
Page 114
User Tools (System Settings) 94 4 Registering a Protection Code To a Group User A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book: Program/Change/ Delete Group ] . E Press the group key you want to register a protection code to. F Press [ Protect[...]
-
Page 115
Registering Destinations to a Group 95 4 Registering Destinations to a Group Register destinations to a group to easily control registered fax, e-mail and folders for each group. To group destinations, the groups must be registered beforehand. Note r You can register up to 500 groups. r When using Scan to Folder func- tion, you cannot send scan fil[...]
-
Page 116
User Tools (System Settings) 96 4 Registering Destinations to a Group You can register destinations to a group. When registering new destinations, you can also register groups at the same time. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book Ma[...]
-
Page 117
Registering Destinations to a Group 97 4 E Select the group where the dat a you want to check is registered. F Press [ Programed Users ] . All the user (destination) names appear. Press [ OK ] . Changing a Group Name A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D [...]
-
Page 118
User Tools (System Settings) 98 4 Registering the Transfer Request This section descr i bes how to register the Transfer Station and Receiving Station used in the fax function's Transfer Request. Note r Before you can use Transfer Re- quest, you must program the Poll- ing ID and set the Transfer Report. See “Programming a Polling ID”and ?[...]
-
Page 119
Registering the Transfer Request 99 4 B Enter the Transfer Request name or key display, and then press [ OK ] . Reference p.147 “Entering Text” To select the title A To associate a Transfer Re- quest name with a title, press the title key under Select Title. Note r The keys you can select are as follows: • [ Freq. ] … Added to the page that[...]
-
Page 120
User Tools (System Settings) 100 4 M When you have specified all the Receiving Stations, press [ OK ] . N Press [ Exit ] . Changing a Registered Transfer Station/Receiving Station A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book: Program/Change/[...]
-
Page 121
Registering the Transfer Request 101 4 Deleting a Registered Transfer Station/Receiving Station A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ System Settings ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] , and then press [ T Next ] . D Press [ Address Book: Program/Change/ Delete Transfer Reques t ] . E Press [ Delete ] . F Select a Transfer Request you w[...]
-
Page 122
User Tools (System Settings) 102 4 Programming/Changing LDAP Server Programming an LDAP ser ver allows you to look up e-mail destinations from the LDAP server Address Book directly. This function is available when you send scan files by e-mail using scanner funct ion. Note r Select [ ON ] in the Use LDAP Server setting to use this functio n. See p.[...]
-
Page 123
Programming/Changing LDAP Server 103 4 To enter a port number A Press [ Change ] under Port No.. B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press [ # ] . To set authentication A Press [ Next ] . B Press [ ON ] or [ High Security ] un- der Authentication. Note r [ High Security ] is not avai lable with LDAP Version 2. r When [ ON ] or [[...]
-
Page 124
User Tools (System Settings) 104 4 E Enter the attribute's display name, and then press [ OK ] . Note r For example, if you want to sort e-mail addresses by em- ployees' number, enter “em- ployeeNo” in the Attribute field, and “Employee No.” in the Key Display field. F Press [ OK ] . G Press [ Exit ] . H Press the { User Tools/Cou[...]
-
Page 125
Programming/Changing LDAP Server 105 4 To change the user name and password A Press [ Next ] . B Press [ Change ] under User Name. C Enter the new user name, and then press [ OK ] . D Press [ Change ] under Password. E Enter the new password, and then press [ OK ] . Note r The user name and password are of a user who is author- ized to access the L[...]
-
Page 126
User Tools (System Settings) 106 4[...]
-
Page 127
107 5. Troubleshooting If Your Machine Does Not Operate As You Want The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messages. If other message s app ear, follow the instructions displayed. Note r I f yo u c a n n o t m a k e c o p i es as y o u wa nt because of paper type, paper size or paper capacity problems, use recommend ed paper.[...]
-
Page 128
Troubleshooting 108 5 Problem Causes Solutions The main power indicator continues blinking and does not turn off when pressed. This occurs in the follow- ing cases: • The exposure glass cov- er or the ADF is open. • The machine is commu- nicating with external equipment. • The hard disk is active. Close the exposure glass cover or ADF, and ch[...]
-
Page 129
If Your Machine Does Not Operate As You Want 109 5 Document Server Problem Solutions " Scanned pages exceeded max. number. Do you want to store the scanned pages as a file? " appears. The number of scanned pages exce eds the ca- pacity per file of the Document Server. To store scanned pages as a file, press [ Store File ] . Scanned data i[...]
-
Page 130
Troubleshooting 110 5 B Loading Paper Reference For paper types and sizes, see p.167 “Copy Paper”. Loading Paper into Paper Trays Note r You can change the paper size, see p.126 “Changing the Paper Size”. A Pull the paper tray out slowly un- til it stops. B Square the paper, and then load it into the tray. Important r Check that the top of [...]
-
Page 131
B Loading Paper 111 5 Note r Make sure no paper sheet is in- volved in the paper feeding side of the LCT. Remove the sheet, if any. C Load paper into the tray along the edge on the left. Note r The tray contains up to 1,500 sheets. Important r Make sure the paper stack is flush against the left side fence. r Check the top of the stack is not higher[...]
-
Page 132
Troubleshooting 112 5 Orientation-Fixed Pape r or Two-Sided Paper Orientation-fixed (top to bo ttom) or tw o-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, prepunched paper, or copied pa per) might no t print correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed. Select [ Yes ] in Letterhead Setting un- der Copier/Document Server Features, an[...]
-
Page 133
D Adding Toner 113 5 D Adding Toner When D appears, it is time to add toner. R WARNING: R CAUTION: Important r Faults may occur i f you use toner ot her than the recomme nded type. r When adding toner, do not turn off the operat ion switch. If you do, settings will be lost. r Always add toner when th e machine instructs you. r Do not repeatedly ins[...]
-
Page 134
Troubleshooting 114 5 Removing Toner • 1: Open the fron t cover of the machine . • 2: Lift the green lever. • 3: Push the green lever, and then gently pull out the holder. • 4: Press the toner bottle back to raise its top, and then gently pull it out.[...]
-
Page 135
Inserting Toner 115 5 Inserting Toner • 1: Hold the new bottle horizontally and shake it from side to side five or six times. Note r Do not remove the black cap before shaking. •2 : R e m o v e t h e b l a c k c a p . Note r Do not remove the inner cap. • 3: Put the toner bottle on the holder, and then pull its top forward. • 4: Push in the[...]
-
Page 136
Troubleshooting 116 5 x Clearing Misfeeds R CAUTION: Important r When clearing misfeeds, do not turn o ff the operation switch. If you do, your copy settings will be lost. r To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the ma- chine. r If paper misfeeds occur fr equently, contact y our service representative. Note r More than o[...]
-
Page 137
x Clearing Misfeeds 117 5[...]
-
Page 138
Troubleshooting 118 5[...]
-
Page 139
x Clearing Misfeeds 119 5[...]
-
Page 140
Troubleshooting 120 5[...]
-
Page 141
x Clearing Misfeeds 121 5[...]
-
Page 142
Troubleshooting 122 5[...]
-
Page 143
x Clearing Misfeeds 123 5 ZHVX030J[...]
-
Page 144
Troubleshooting 124 5[...]
-
Page 145
x Clearing Misfeeds 125 5[...]
-
Page 146
Troubleshooting 126 5 Changing the Paper Size Preparation Be sure to select the paper size with User Tools and the paper siz e selector. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. See p.55 “Tray Paper Size: Tray 1–4”. Important r If you want to chan ge the paper size set in the LCT, contact your service representative. Reference For details about p[...]
-
Page 147
Changing the Paper Size 127 5 F Square the paper and load it into the tray. Important r Check that the top of the st ack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. r Make sure the paper stack is flush against the right side fence. Note r Fan the paper before loading. r Straighten cu rled or warped pa- per before loading. G After loading, ma[...]
-
Page 148
Troubleshooting 128 5 G Press [ Exit ] or the { User Tools/Counter } key to quit User Tools. Reference p.55 “Tray Paper Size: Tray 1–4” J Gently push the paper tray in un- til it stops. K Check the paper size shown on the display panel.[...]
-
Page 149
d Adding Staples 129 5 d Adding Staples Important r Stapling failure or jams may occur if yo u use a staple cartridge other than that recommended. Reference For details about the type of finisher, see p.18 “External Options” . 1000-Sheet Finisher • 1: Open the front cover of the finisher, and then pull out the staple uni t. • 2: Hold the gr[...]
-
Page 150
Troubleshooting 130 5 2 Tray Finisher • 6: Align the arrows on the new refill with those on the cartridge, and then push in the refill until it clicks. • 7: Gently push down the upper unit into the cartridge. • 8: Pull out the ribbon. • 9: Hold the green lever while pushing in the cartridge until it clicks. • 10: Push back the staple unit[...]
-
Page 151
d Adding Staples 131 5 • 3: Hold both sides of the cartridge. • 4: Pull up the upper unit of the cartridge. • 5: Take out the empty refill in the arrow di- rection. • 6: Align the arrows on the new refill and the cartridge, and then push in the refill until it clicks. • 7: Gently push down the upper unit into the cartridge. • 8: Pull ou[...]
-
Page 152
Troubleshooting 132 5 Booklet Finisher • 1: Open the front cov er of the finisher. • 2: Pull lever R6 down, and then pull out the cartridge while lifting the cartridge. • 3: Take out the empty refill in the arrow di- rection. • 4: Set the new refill. • 5: Pull out the ribbon. • 6: Push in the cartridge until it clicks. • 7: Close the [...]
-
Page 153
d Adding Staples 133 5 Staple unit for saddle stitch function v Using “Prepare Stapling ”in User Tools to init ialize the staple unit When the book let finisher is instal led, make sure to initialize the staple unit for the saddle stitch function with User Tools after adding staples or removed jammed staples. If you do not do this , copies may [...]
-
Page 154
Troubleshooting 134 5 Removing Jammed Staples Note r Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to stiffer copy paper. r When the book let finisher is installed, after removing jammed staples, staples will not be ejected the first few times you try to use t he stapler. [...]
-
Page 155
Removing Jammed Staples 135 5 2 Tray Finisher • 5: Pull down the cartridge's face plate until it clicks. • 6: Hold the green lever while pushing in the cartridge until it clicks. • 7: Push back the staple unit, and then close the front co ver of the finisher . • 1: Open the front cov er of the finisher. • 2: Hold the green lever whil[...]
-
Page 156
Troubleshooting 136 5 Booklet Finisher • 5: Pull down the cartridge's knob until it clicks. • 6: Hold the green lever while pushing in the cartridge until it clicks. • 7: Close the front cover of the finisher. • 1: Open the front cov er of the finisher. • 2: Pull lever R6 down, and then pull out the cartridge while lifting the cartri[...]
-
Page 157
Removing Jammed Staples 137 5 Staple unit for saddle stitch function Reference Initialize th e staple unit for th e saddle stitch functio n after removing ja mmed staples. See p.133 “Using “Prepare Stapli ng ”in User Tools to initialize the sta- ple unit”. • 6: Push in the cartridge until it clicks. • 7: Close the front cover of the fin[...]
-
Page 158
Troubleshooting 138 5 y Removing Punch Waste Note r While “ Punch Receptacle Full ” is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function. A Open the front cover of the 2 Tray finisher. B Pull out the punch waste box, and then remove punch waste. C Reinstall the punch waste box. Note r I f y o u d o n o t , “ Punch Recepta- cle Full ” is still di[...]
-
Page 159
139 6. Remarks Dos and Don'ts R CAUTION: Important r Do not turn the power off while the On indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so may damage the hard disk. r Before unplugging the power cord or turning off the main pow er switch, make sure remaining memory space is at 100%, as shown on the display. See p.24 “Turning Off the Power” and “[...]
-
Page 160
Remarks 140 6 Toner Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUTION: Important r Faults may occur i f you use toner ot her than the recomme nded type. Reference To add toner, see p.113 “ D Adding Toner”. Toner Storage When storing to ner, the following pr ecautions should always be followed: • Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from di rect[...]
-
Page 161
Where to Put Your Machine 141 6 Where to Put Your Machine Machine Environment Choose your machine's location care- fully. Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance. Optimum environmental conditions R CAUTION: R CAUTION: • Temperature: 10-32 ° C (50-89.6 ° F) (humidity to be 54% at 32 ° C, 89.6 ° F) • Humidity: 15-80% (tem[...]
-
Page 162
Remarks 142 6 r Do not take off the holding stan d. r Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impac t can damage the hard disk and cause stored files to be lost. As a precautionary meas- u r e , f i l e s s h o u l d b e c o p i e d t o a n - other computer. Power Connection R WARNING: R CAUTION: R CAUTION: • When the main power switch is in the [...]
-
Page 163
Maintaining Your Machine 143 6 Maintaining Your Machine If the exposure glass, exposure glass co v e r , or A D F b e l t i s d i r ty , c o p y c la r i - ty may be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty. v Cleaning the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth, and then wi pe it with a dry cloth to remove the water. Important r Do no[...]
-
Page 164
Remarks 144 6 Changing the Photoconductor Unit (PCU) Only use the photoconductor unit made specifically for this machine. Follow the procedure below to change the unit. Important r Be sure to unplug the power code from the outlet before changing the photocon ductor unit. A Open the front door, duplex unit, and then transfe r unit right cover. B Pus[...]
-
Page 165
Other Functions 145 6 Other Functions Inquiry The inquiry function lets you check the telephon e numbers t o contact for repairs, or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer to verify the follow- ing: v Consumables • Telephone No. to order •T o n e r •S t a p l e • Staple (Centre) •T X S t a m p N a m e[...]
-
Page 166
Remarks 146 6 Counter Displaying the Total Counter You can dis play the t otal counte r val- ue used for all functions. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ Counter ] . C To print a counter list, press [ Print Counter List ] . D Press the { Start } key. A counter list pri nts out. ZCAS100E[...]
-
Page 167
147 7. Entering Text Entering Text This section describes how to enter characters. When you enter a character, it ap- pears at the position of the cur sor. If ther e is a character already at the cursor po- sition, the entered character appears before that. Available Characters • Alphabetic characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs[...]
-
Page 168
Entering Text 148 7 How to Enter Text Entering letters A Press [ Shift ] to switch between uppercase and lowercase. B Press the letters you want to enter. Deleting characters A Press [ Backspace ] or [ Delete All ] to delete characters.[...]
-
Page 169
149 8. Security Security Confidential information is always at ri sk of being copied without permission or subject to unauthorized acce ss through the network. To protect document s from such intrusion, not only can passwords be set, but also the Extended Security function can be used to strengthen security. For those who require increased document[...]
-
Page 170
Security 150 8 v Documents stored in the Document Server by the following functions • Document Server functi on •C o p i e r f u n c t i o n •F a x t r a n s m i s s i o n •S c a n n e r f u n c t i o n • Printer driver v Documents stored from the printer dr iver using the Locked Print function Reference For information about Document Se [...]
-
Page 171
Security 151 8 Unlocking a locked document Unlock a document that was locked because a w rong password was ente red multiple times, making it available for authorized use rs to access again. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B On the display panel, press [ System Settings ] , and then press [ Password Man- agement for Stored Files ] . C Press[...]
-
Page 172
Security 152 8 Operating Environment and Notes Security for this machine is assured on the premises that the machine is used un- der the following conditions: Operating Environment • The condit ion of the mach ine is no rmal. (For ex ample, it i s not damaged, modified, or lacking components.) • When the machine is connected to a network, the m[...]
-
Page 173
Operating Environment and Notes 153 8 For User • Be careful not to let anyone know your password, especially when entering a password or recording it. Keep any reco rd of your password in a safe place. • Avoid using a si ngle number or con s ecutive numbers for a password such as “0000” or “1234”, since the numbers like th is are easy t[...]
-
Page 174
Security 154 8[...]
-
Page 175
155 9. Specifications Main unit v Configuration: Desktop v Photosensitivity type: OPC drum v Original scanning: One-dimensional solid scan ning system through C CD v Copy process: Dry electrostatic tr ansfer system v Development: Dry two-component magnetic brush development system v Fusing: Heating roll pressure system v Resolution: 600 dpi v Expos[...]
-
Page 176
Specifications 156 9 v Copy paper size: •T r a y s : A 3 L – A5 L , 11" × 17" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " L •B y p a s s : A 3 L – A6 L , 11" × 17" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " L • Bypass (custom size): Vertical: 100 – 297 mm, 4 – 11.7 in Horizontal: 148 – 600 mm, 5 .9 – 23.6 in •D u p [...]
-
Page 177
Main unit 157 9 v Reproduction ratio: Preset reproduction ratios: Zoom: From 25 to 400% in increments of 1%. v Maximum continuous copy run: 999 sheets v Paper capacity: • Tray 1, 2: 550 sheets (72 g/m 2 , 19 lb.) • Bypass tray: 50 sheets (72 g/m 2 , 19 lb.) v Power consumption: • Main unit only • Complete system *1 *1 The complete system co[...]
-
Page 178
Specifications 158 9 v Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass): Type 1, 2: 670 × 650 × 720 mm, 26.4 × 25.6 × 28.3 in v Space for main unit (W × D): Type 1, 2: 980 × 650 mm, 38.6 × 25.6 in (By pass tray extende r is used fo r large size paper) v Noise emission *1 : Sound power level: • Main unit only • Complete system *3 Sound press[...]
-
Page 179
Options 159 9 Options Exposure Glass Cover Lower this over originals for copying. Auto Document Feeder v Mode: ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Size mode, Custom Size Origi- nals mode v Original size: •A 3 L – B6 JIS KL (except two-sided originals of B6 JIS KL ) • 11" × 17" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL v Original[...]
-
Page 180
Specifications 160 9 1000-Sheet Finisher Finisher Upper Tray: v Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 KL , B6 JIS L , A6 L , 12" × 18" L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 10 1 / 2 " × 7 1 / 4 " KL , 8 1 / 2 " × 13" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 8" × 13" L , 8 1[...]
-
Page 181
Options 161 9 v Dimensions (W × D × H): 520 × 520 × 790 mm, 20.5 × 20.5 × 31.1 in (including trays) v Weight: Approx. 25 kg, 55.2 lb. 2 Tray Finisher Finisher Shift Tray 1: v Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 KL , B6 JIS L , A6 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 5 1 /[...]
-
Page 182
Specifications 162 9 v Staple paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL v Staple paper weight: 64 – 90 g/m 2 , 17 – 24 lb. v Staple position: • 1 staple – 3 positions • 2 staples – 1 position v Power consumption: Less than 50 W (power is su ppl[...]
-
Page 183
Options 163 9 Booklet Finisher Finisher Upper Tray: v Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 KL , B6 JIS L , A6 L , 11" × 17" L , 11" × 15" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " L v Paper weight : 52 – 163 g/m 2 , 14 – 43 lb. v Stack capacity: • [...]
-
Page 184
Specifications 164 9 v Saddle stitch • Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb.) • Saddle stitching capacity: 15 sheets • Stack capacity: 2–5 sheets: 25 sets 6–10 sheets: 15 sets 11–15 sheets: 10 sets • Folding: Centre folding •P a p [...]
-
Page 185
Options 165 9 Internal Tray 2 (1 bin tray) v Number of bins: 1 v Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , B5 JIS KL , A5 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " L v Paper capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb.) v Paper weight : 60 – 105 g/m 2 (16 – 28 l b.) v Maximum pow[...]
-
Page 186
Specifications 166 9 Paper Tray Unit v Paper weight : 60–105 g/m 2 (16–28 lb.) v Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 13" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 8 1 / 4 " × 13" L , 8" × 13" L , 7 1 / 4 " × 10 1 / 2 " [...]
-
Page 187
Copy Paper 167 9 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Types The following limit ations apply to each tray: Tray type Paper type and weight Metric version Inch version Paper capacity Tray 1, 2 Paper tray unit (op- tional) 64-105 g/m 2 (17-28 lb.) A3 L , A4 KL , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL 5[...]
-
Page 188
Specifications 168 9 *1 See p.127 “To adju st the pape r size to a size not indicated on the paper size selec tor” *2 When copying onto custom size paper, yo u need to specify vertical and horizontal dimensions. See “Copying from the Bypass Tray”, Copy Reference . *3 Select [ OHP Sheet ] or [ Thick Paper ] in the display panel. See “Copyi[...]
-
Page 189
Copy Paper 169 9 r I f y o u l o a d p a p e r o f t h e s a m e s i z e i n the same orientat ion in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when the first t ray in use runs out of pap er. This function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. (How- ever, if one tray has recycled or specia l paper, the settings of the oth[...]
-
Page 190
Specifications 170 9 Note r To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following ki nds of paper: • Bent, folded, or creased paper • Torn paper • Slippery paper • Perforated paper • Rough paper • Thin paper with little stiffness • Paper with a dusty surface r If you copy onto rough grain pa per, the image might be blurred. Paper Storage Note[...]
-
Page 191
171 INDEX 1000-sheet finisher , 18 , 160 1 bin tray , 18 2 Tray finisher , 18 , 161 A Adding staples , 129 Adding toner , 113 Address Book , 67 change order , 63 edit title , 64 program/change/delete group , 63 program/change /delete tran sfer request , 63 select title , 65 Address Book Management , 62 Auto Delete File , 65 Auto Document Feeder , 1[...]
-
Page 192
172 E E-mail de stination , 82 Energy Saver key , 20 Entering text , 147 Environment , 141 Exposure glass , 15 cleaning , 143 Exposure glass cover , 18 cleaning , 143 Extended security , 60 Extended Security function , 149 External charge unit management , 60 External options , 18 F Fax destination , 76 Finisher 1000-sheet finisher , 18 2 Tray fini[...]
-
Page 193
173 R Receiving Station , 98 Registering a fax destination , 77 Registering an e-mail destination , 82 Registering a new user code , 70 Registering a prote ction code , 93 Registering a protection code to a group user , 94 Registering a protection code to a single user , 93 Registering a Trans fer Station/ Receiving Stati on , 98 Registering destin[...]
-
Page 194
174 GB GB B138-6500 MEMO[...]
-
Page 195
Network Guide For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "General Settings Guide" befo re you use it. Functions Availabl e over a Network Connecting the Ne twork Cable to th e Network Setting Up the Machine on a Network Windows Configur ation Using the Pr inter Func tion Using Smar tNetM[...]
-
Page 196
Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the operatio n and no tes about the use of thi s machine. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine all opera tors are requested to re ad this manual carefull y and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the machine . Important Contents o[...]
-
Page 197
i TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ......... ......... ........ ....... ..... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... . 1 How to Read Thi s Manual ....... ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ........... ........ ......... ........ 3 1. Functions Available over a Network Usi ng the Pri nter ... ...... ..... .... ....[...]
-
Page 198
ii 5. Using the Printe r Func tion Printing wi th Windows ..... ...... ..... ....... ...... ....... ....... ........ ..... ........ ....... ..... ........ .... 52 Printin g with a Window s 2000/ XP or Windo ws NT Print Server ........ ....... ......... ...... . 52 Printin g witho ut a Pr int S erver ............. ...... ......... ...... ....... ...[...]
-
Page 199
iii 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet .......... ......... ........... ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... . 89 Using te lnet ...... ....... ...... ......... ...... ....... ......... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... .... 8 9 Comma nds L ist ....... ......... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... .[...]
-
Page 200
iv[...]
-
Page 201
1 Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the relevant parts o f the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file. ❒ Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 “Operat[...]
-
Page 202
2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, and the operating environment for DeskT op- Binder V2 Lite in d etail. This guide[...]
-
Page 203
3 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a potent ially haz ardou s situatio n which, if inst ruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury. R CAUTION: This sym bol indicat es a potent ially haz ardou s situatio n which, if inst ruction s are not fol[...]
-
Page 204
4[...]
-
Page 205
5 1. Functions Available over a Netwo rk This ma chine p rovid es pr inter, L AN-Fa x, In ternet Fa x, and sca nner f unctions over a network. Using the Document Server func tion , you can combine cop ied documents and print jobs into a single document. Not only can you print this document straight away, but you can also store it so it can be print[...]
-
Page 206
Functions Available over a Network 6 1 Using Fax Internet Fax This machine converts scann ed document images to e-mail format and transmits the data over the Internet. Specify the e-mail addres s instead of the fa x number, and the n send the docu- ment . E-mail can be received on a fax machine that supp orts Internet Fax, or on a com- puter that c[...]
-
Page 207
Using Fax 7 1 LAN-Fax You can fax documents over phone lines from any computer connected to the machine via Ethernet, IEEE 1 394 (IP over 1394), or wirele ss LAN. To send a fax, print from the Windows application you ar e working with, select LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify the destin ation. You can also chec k the sent image data. Referen[...]
-
Page 208
Functions Available over a Network 8 1 Network Scanner E-mail Scan f ile atta ched to an e- mail ca n be s ent usi ng the e-mail system throug h a LAN or the In ternet. Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to make, see p .17 “ Setting Up the Machine on a Network ” . For details about using this function, see "Sending Scan File by E-[...]
-
Page 209
Network Scanner 9 1 Scan to Folder You can sen d scan fi le direc tly to shared folder s on computer s running Win- dow s or to FT P ser vers. For details about what sett ings to make, see p.17 “ S etting Up the Machine on a Netwo rk ” . For details about using this functio n, see “ Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder ” , Scanner Ref erence[...]
-
Page 210
Functions Available over a Network 10 1 Network De livery Scanner You can use the machine as a delivery sc anner for ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profes- sional. Scan file or document received by fax can be stored in the delivery server, or de- livered via the network to specified folders on client computers. Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to ma[...]
-
Page 211
Network Scanner 11 1 Network T WAIN Scan ner You can use the scann ing functio n of this machine from a comp uter connect ed via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394), or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)). You can sc an documen ts the same way you woul d if you wer e using a scanner connect ed direct ly to your c omputer. Reference For details a[...]
-
Page 212
Functions Available over a Network 12 1 Document S erver You can st ore copy, fax , printer, and scanner do cuments o n the hard disk . Using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite or a Web browser, you can browse, print, delete, or copy these documents over a network. Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to make, see p .17 “ Setting Up the Machine on a Ne[...]
-
Page 213
13 2. Connecting the Network Cable to the Network Confirming the Connection 1. 10BASE-T/100BASE -TX port Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable 2. IEEE 1394 ports (optional) Ports for co nnecting the IE EE 1394 int er- face cable 3. Wireless LAN port (optiona l) Port for u sing the w irele ss L AN Note ❒ The IEEE 1394 int erface boa[...]
-
Page 214
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 14 2 Connectin g to the Eth ernet Interf ace The network interface board supp orts 10BASE-T or 1 00BASE-TX connec - tions. A A A A Turn o ff the main powe r switch. Important ❒ Make sure the main po wer is off. See “ Turning On the Pow- er ” , General Settings Guide . B B B B Connect the Ethernet in[...]
-
Page 215
Confirming the Connection 15 2 Using the IEEE 802.1 1b (Wireless LAN) A A A A Make s ure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b card is l it. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using in inf rastructure mode 1. If [ LAN Type ] on the [ Inte rface Se t- tings ] / [ Network ] screen is not set to [ IEEE 802.11b ] , it do es not li ght, ev en if the m ain powe r is on. 2. If i[...]
-
Page 216
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 16 2[...]
-
Page 217
17 3. Setting Up the Machine on a Network User Tools Menu ( System Settings ) This section des cribes the network settin gs you can ch ange with User Too ls (Sys- tem Set tings). Make sett ings acc ording to funct ions y ou want to use and th e in- terface to be connected. Important ❒ These settin gs should be made by the s ystems administrator, [...]
-
Page 218
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 18 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priori ty. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] is sel[...]
-
Page 219
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 19 3 Internet Fax Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se t- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Effective Protocol *5 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.38 ?[...]
-
Page 220
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 20 3 IEEE 1394 ( IP over 1394) Interface Set- ting s/IEE E 1394 *1 See p.36 “ Interfa ce Settin gs/IEE E 1394 ” . IP Addr ess $ IP ove r 1394 $ WINS Configuration ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ Interface Set- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration [...]
-
Page 221
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 21 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Minimum settings required to us[...]
-
Page 222
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 22 3 E-mail Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se t- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Effective Protocol *3 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.38 “ Fi[...]
-
Page 223
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 23 3 IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) Interface Set- ting s/IEE E 1394 *1 See p.36 “ Interfa ce Settin gs/IEE E 1394 ” . IP Addr ess $ IP ove r 1394 $ WINS Configuration ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ Interface Set- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍[...]
-
Page 224
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 24 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the 802.11b (wireless LAN) b oard (op tional) is i nstalled. If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] is sele cted for[...]
-
Page 225
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 25 3 Scan to Folder Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se t- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Effective Protocol *3 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.38 [...]
-
Page 226
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 26 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priori ty. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] is sel[...]
-
Page 227
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 27 3 Network De livery Scanner Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se t- tings/Network See p.34 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address ❍ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Effective Protocol *4 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Trans[...]
-
Page 228
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 28 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priori ty. *3 When deliv ery opti on is s[...]
-
Page 229
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 29 3 Network T WAIN Scan ner *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Check [[...]
-
Page 230
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 30 3 Document Ser ver *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b (wir eless LAN) boar d (opti onal) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priori ty. *3 Check [ Ef[...]
-
Page 231
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 31 3 Networ k Configur ation Any change you make with User Tool s rem ains i n ef fect e ven i f the main power sw itch or operation switch is tur ned off, o r the { { { { Energy Saver } } } } or { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key i s pre ssed. Configuring the network us ing the control panel Note ❒ Operations for S[...]
-
Page 232
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 32 3 Configuring the network using othe r utilities As well as using the control panel to make network settings, utilities such as a Web browser and SmartNetMonitor for Admin can also be used. The following table show s available se ttings : Note ❒❍ Indica tes machine s ettings can be changed. ❒ - Indicates[...]
-
Page 233
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 33 3 Inte rfac e Settings Network Effective Protocol TCP/IP - ❍ *1 ❍ NetWare ❍❍ *2 ❍ SMB ❍❍❍ AppleT alk ❍❍❍ SNMP ❍❍❍ Host Nam e ❍❍❍ Domain Name ❍ - ❍ IEEE 1394 IP Ad- dress Auto-Ob tain (DHCP) ❍ - ❍ Specif y IP Address ❍ - ❍ Sub-n et Mask ❍ - ❍ IP over 1394 ❍ - ?[...]
-
Page 234
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 34 3 *1 You can mak e the TCP/I P settin gs if Smar tNetMonit or for Ad min is comm unicating with the machi ne using IPX/SP X. *2 You can make the IP X/SPX sett ings if SmartN etMonitor f or Admin is communi cat- ing w ith th e ma chin e usin g TCP /IP . Settings You C an Change with User Tool s Interfa ce Setti[...]
-
Page 235
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 35 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Gatew ay Ad dress A gateway is a connectio n or inter- change point betw een two net- works. Configure the ga teway address for the router or host com- puter used as a ga teway. • Gatewa y Addre ss: 000. 000. 000.0 00 Note ❒ Def au lt : 000.000.000.0 00 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ DNS Configuration Mak[...]
-
Page 236
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 36 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Effective Protocol Select the protoco l to use in the network. • TCP/IP :Effective/Invalid • NetWare:Effective/Invalid • SMB:Effective/Invalid • AppleTalk:Effective/Invalid Note ❒ Def au lt : TCP/IP:Effective, Net- Ware:Effective, SMB:E ffective, Appl eTalk:E ffectiv e ❖ ❖ ❖ ?[...]
-
Page 237
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 37 3 Limitatio n ❒ Enter [ Scope ID ] using up to 31 alphanumeric cha racters. Note ❒ Def au lt : OFF ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ SCSI print (SBP -2) When you print using the SCSI print c lient func tion sup ported by Windows 2000 or Window s XP, you must se t SCSI pr int. • Activ e • Inact ive Note ❒ Def au lt : Act[...]
-
Page 238
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 38 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ WEP (Encryption) Setting Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN). If this is set to [ Active ] , you must en- ter the WEP key. • WEP • Active • Inactive • Encrypt ion Note ❒ Def au lt : Inactive ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Wireless LAN Signal Shows the radio w ave co nditio[...]
-
Page 239
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 39 3 Note ❒ Default: Do not Deliver • Print at Delivery Specifies whether or not received fax docum ents sen t to ScanR out- er V2 Professi onal should also be prin ted a t the sam e tim e. • Prin t • Do not Print Note ❒ Default: Do not Print • Fi le t o D eli ve r Specifies whether al l received fax do[...]
-
Page 240
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 40 3 ❒ Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified. Add "@" af ter th e user name , as in "user name @realm". ❒ Enter [ Password ] usin g up to 63 alphanumeric cha racters. Space can not be used. ❒ Enter the user name and p ass- word to be set for [ Key Operato[...]
-
Page 241
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 41 3 Limitatio n ❒ Enter POP3 or IMAP4 [ Server Name ] using to 127 alphanu meric characters. Space ca n not be used. Note ❒ [ Encryption ] - [ Auto ] : Password en- cryption is automatically set ac- cording to the POP server settings. ❒ [ Encryp ti on ] - [ ON ] : Encrypt pass- word. ❒ [ Encryption ] - [ O[...]
-
Page 242
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 42 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Default User Na me/ Password (Send) You can speci fy the us er name and pass word requi red wh en send ing scan file d irectly to a shared folder on a comp uter running Windows, or to an FTP server. • SMB Us er Na me • SMB Passwo rd • FTP Us er Name • FTP Password Limitatio n ❒ Ente[...]
-
Page 243
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 43 3 Programming, changing, or deleting an e-mail me ssage Limita tion ❒ Enter a name using up to 20 alpha- numeric cha racters. ❒ E n t e r u p t o f i v e l i n e s o f t e x t . E a c h line can consist of up to 80 alpha- numeric cha racters. A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B [...]
-
Page 244
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 44 3 Programming, changing, or deleting a subject Limita tion ❒ Enter a subject us ing up to 20 al- phanumeric char acters. Note ❒ [ Urgent ] and [ High ] are programmed as the e-mail subjects . A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Press [ Syste m Settings ] . C C C C Press [ File[...]
-
Page 245
45 4. Windows Configuration Configuring TCP/I P This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows for TCP/I P and IPP. Configuring a Wi ndows 95/98/Me Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows 9 5/98/Me compu- ter to use TCP/ IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then double-click the Networ k icon. Make s ure [ TCP/IP ] is list[...]
-
Page 246
Windows Configuration 46 4 Configuring a Windows XP Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figur e a Wind ows XP comp uter to use TCP/IP. A A A A On the [ Start ] men u, cl ick [ Contro l Pane l ] , and then click [ Net work and Internet Connections ] . B B B B Click [ Network C onnections ] , and then double-click [ Local Area Con- nection[...]
-
Page 247
Configuring NetBEUI 47 4 Configuring NetBEUI This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows to use Ne tBEU I. Limita tion ❒ NetBEU I cannot be use d under Windows XP. Note ❒ NetBEUI appears as SMB in the control pa nel, manual, and rel ated utilities. Configuring a Wi ndows 95/98/Me Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows [...]
-
Page 248
Windows Configuration 48 4 Configuring a Windows NT Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows NT computer to use NetBE UI. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then double-click the Networ k icon. Make s ure [ NetBEUI Protocol ] is listed in the [ Network protoco ls ] box on th e [ Protocols ] tab. Note ❒ If NetBE UI is not [...]
-
Page 249
49 5. Using the Printer Function This section co ntains in structio ns fo r configur ing the m achine a s a n etwork printer. Read th e section th at relates to your netw ork environm ent for info rma- tion about correct c onfiguration. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Windows 2000/ XP or Windows NT Print Ser ver To set up the machine as a ne twork [...]
-
Page 250
Using the Printer Function 50 5 • Printi ng wi thou t a pri nt se rver Note ❒ Under Wind ows XP, y ou cannot print via SmartNet Monitor for Client using SMB. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Macintosh To set up the machine as a network prin ter in a Macin tosh environment, see p.56 “ Printin g with a Macint osh ” . TCP/IP SMB IPP TCP/IP SMB [...]
-
Page 251
51 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with NetWare To set up the machine as a p rint server or remote printer in a N etWare envi- ronment, see p .58 “ Pri nti ng with NetW are ” . Th e network interface board al- lows you to use the machine as either a print server or a remote print er. • Configuring the machine as a print s erver • Configuring the[...]
-
Page 252
Using the Printer Function 52 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with UNIX For UNIX printing information, visit o ur Web site or consult y our autho rized dealer. Printing with Windows Printi ng with a Windows 2000/XP or Windo ws NT P rint Server This describes how to configure a cli- ent computer on a network using Windows 20 00/XP, Wi ndows NT Server or [...]
-
Page 253
Printing with Windows 53 5 Limita tion ❒ When using a print server connect- ed to the mach ine with SmartN et- Monitor for Client, yo u cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing. ❒ When using Windows XP as a print server, the client computer cann ot re ceive n otifica tion o f prin t job completion. Note ❒ This secti on assumes the c[...]
-
Page 254
Using the Printer Function 54 5 Changin g port se ttings This desc ribes how to ch ange the port settings under W indows 2000 when a printer driver has been install ed. A A A A In th e [ Printers ] window , click the icon of the printer y ou wan t to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ] . B B B B Click the [ Ports ] tab, and then click [[...]
-
Page 255
Printing with Windows 55 5 C If necessa ry, enter the name to identify the print- er in the [ IPP Port Name(I) ] box. Enter a different name from those of any existi ng port nam e. If yo u do not do this, t he address entered in the [ Printer URL( U) ] box is set as the IPP p ort name. D If a proxy server an d IPP user name ar e used, click [ Deta [...]
-
Page 256
Using the Printer Function 56 5 Printing with a Macintosh This des cribes how to con figure a Macinto sh comp uter to us e EtherTalk. Actua l procedures may vary depending on the version of the Mac O S. The foll ow ing proce dur es describe h ow to c onfigure Ma c OS 9.1 and Mac OS X v10.1. If you are using othe r versio n than Ma c OS 9.1 and Mac [...]
-
Page 257
Printing with a Macintosh 57 5 D D D D If you chan ge zones, sel ect a name on the [ AppleTalk Z one: ] pop-up menu. E E E E When the setting is complete, click [ Apply Now ] . Configur ing the Printer Use the control panel to activate the AppleTalk protocol. (The default is active.) Reference For more in format ion about con - figuration , see p.3[...]
-
Page 258
Using the Printer Function 58 5 Printing with NetWare This describes how to configure the machine for use a s a print server or remote printer in a NetWare environ- ment . This secti on assu mes NetW are is functional and the necessary environ- ment for the NetWare print service is available. Note ❒ NetWare m ust be set to ac tive us- ing the mac[...]
-
Page 259
Printing with NetWare 59 5 Setting Up as a Print Server NetWar e 3.x A A A A Log on to the file server as a Su- pervisor, or eq uivalent. B B B B Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the printer for whi[...]
-
Page 260
Using the Printer Function 60 5 NetWare 4.x, 5/ 5.1, 6 Important ❒ You must set up the p rint server using NDS mode in NetWare 4 .x, 5/5.1, 6. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ To use NetW are 5/5. 1, 6 • Use the printer as a print se rver. Do not use it as a remo te printer in a PureIP environment. • If you use PureIP, configure the mac hi ne to u se TCP /I P[...]
-
Page 261
Printing with NetWare 61 5 J J J J Enter the prin t server name in the [ Print Se rver Nam e(P:) ] box, the pri nter n ame in the [ Printer Name(N): ] box, the print queue name in the [ Print Q ueue Name(Q): ] box, and the pri nt queue volume in the [ Queue Volume(V): ] , and th en click [ Nex t(N) > ] . • In th e [ Print Server Nam e(P): ] bo[...]
-
Page 262
Using the Printer Function 62 5 H H H H Click the [ Ne tWare ] ta b, and the n make the following settings: A In the [ Logon Mode ] area, c lick [ File Server Mode ] or [ NDS Mode ] . Note ❒ If [ File Server Mode ] is sel ect- ed, a connec ting destination will be cho sen based on the string enter ed in step C . ❒ If [ NDS Mode ] is selected, a[...]
-
Page 263
Printing with NetWare 63 5 Setting Up as a Re mote Pr inter NetWar e 3.x A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent. B B B B Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the printer [...]
-
Page 264
Using the Printer Function 64 5 K K K K Create a printer as follows: A On the [ Availabl e Options ] menu, click [ Print Server Infor mation ] , and then press the { { { { ENTER } } } } key. B To create a new print server, press the { { { { INSERT } } } } key, and then enter a prin t server name. Note ❒ If you are usin g a currently defined print[...]
-
Page 265
Printing with NetWare 65 5 NetWare 4.x, 5/ 5.1, 6 A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent. B B B B Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the printer for which you want to c[...]
-
Page 266
Using the Printer Function 66 5 H H H H Quit SmartNetMoni tor for Admin. I I I I On Windo ws, star t NWadmin . Reference For more info rmation abo ut NWadmin, see the operating in- str ucti on s that co me wit h the NetWa re. J J J J Create a print queue as follows: Note ❒ If you are using a currently d e- fined print queue, proceed to step K . A[...]
-
Page 267
Printing with NetWare 67 5 N N N N Assign the printer to the created print server as follows: A Cli ck [ Assignme nts ] , and t hen click [ Add ] in the [ Assi gnments ] area. B In th e [ Av ailable objects ] box, click the queue create d in step J J J J , and then click [ OK ] . C In th e [ Pr int ers ] box, click the printer assigned in step B B [...]
-
Page 268
Using the Printer Function 68 5 D D D D On the [ File ] men u, click [ Proper- ties ] . E E E E Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Add Port ] . F F F F Click [ Networ k ] , and then click [ Browse ] . G G G G In the tree pane, double-click the name of the file server. The queues are displayed. H H H H Select the queue yo u want to print, a[...]
-
Page 269
Printing with NetWare 69 5 - - - - NDPS The machine oper ates using NDPS. Operating requirem ents are as fol- lows: • NetWare Version: 5.0, 5.1, 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer Drivers a nd Operating Systems To use the machine with NDPS, NDPS Gateway is required. • Novell NDPS Gateway For more information about using Novell NDPS Gateway, see the manu[...]
-
Page 270
Using the Printer Function 70 5[...]
-
Page 271
71 6. Using SmartNetMonitor for Client SmartNetMonitor for Client SmartNetMonitor for Client is equipped with the following functions. We rec- ommend all users of this pri nter to install this software. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol Stack ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? • Peer-to-Peer print f unction • Prints directly on t he network printer witho [...]
-
Page 272
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client 72 6 • Noti ficat ion f uncti on • An error message ap pears if there is an error on the specified printer during transfe r or printing of data. • A window op ens to noti fy you o f print comple tion. You can also s elect to be notified of the print condition, such as disp laying the notice only when Recovery [...]
-
Page 273
SmartNetMonitor for Client 73 6 Setting the Net work Monito ring Functio n To vi ew the status of machin es us ing Sma rtNet Monitor for Cl ient, yo u mus t configure SmartNetMonitor for Client in advance, so that it monitors the ma- chine whos e status you want to view. A A A A Start SmartNetMonitor for Client . The SmartNetMonitor for Client icon[...]
-
Page 274
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client 74 6[...]
-
Page 275
75 7. Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin SmartNetMonitor for Admin Using SmartN etMonito r for Admin, no t only can y ou mo nitor the statu s of net- work print ers, but you ca n also c hange t he configur ation o f the ne twork inter- face board usin g TCP/IP o r IPX/SPX p rotocol. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol Stack ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? • L[...]
-
Page 276
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin 76 7 • Allows selection of functions s uch as printing and scan ning for each user code. • Fax numbers and e-mail addr esses stored in the machine can be ch anged and saved by computer. • You can c heck each fax job his tory entry. • You ca n make settings for and display the sta tus chang es of g roup devic [...]
-
Page 277
SmartNetMonitor for Admin 77 7 Changing the Network Interf ace Board Confi guration Limita tion ❒ Internet Expl orer 4.01 or a later version is required to use NIB Set- up Tool . A A A A Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines[...]
-
Page 278
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin 78 7 Locking t he Con trol Pa nel Menu A A A A Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion. C C C[...]
-
Page 279
SmartNetMonitor for Admin 79 7 Managing U ser I nformati on A A A A Start S martN etMo nito r for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search De vice ] , and t hen click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion. C C C C In the l[...]
-
Page 280
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin 80 7 Check Spool Printing Job List on the Web browser, and print out. Reference For more info rmation abo ut Spool Prin ting Job L ist, see Spool Printing Job List Help. Note ❒ To display Spool Printing Job List, spool must be set to [ En a- ble ] on Device Settings in ad- van ce. Managing A ddress Infor matio n A [...]
-
Page 281
81 8. Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser You can chec k the s tatus of a mach ine and chan ge its settings us ing the W eb browser. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? You can remotely check the status of a machine or specify its settings over the network usi ng a comput er's Web brows er. The fol lowi ng func tion s are [...]
-
Page 282
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 82 8 Going to the Top Page 1. Header area You can reg ister favorite URLs u sing [ URL ] . To view the Help section, click [ Help ] . 2. Menu area These buttons are for configuring the net- work inter face board and checking ma- chine status. 3. Status Displays ma chine sta tus, ne twork i[...]
-
Page 283
Types of Menu Configuration and Mode 83 8 Types of Menu Configurat ion and Mode Items that appear on the menu ar ea differ between u ser mode and adminis trator mode . The work area whic h appe ars under the selected men u displays machine status under user m ode and machi ne sett ing under administ rator mode. Note ❒❍ Indicates machine stat us[...]
-
Page 284
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 84 8 Limita tion ❒ Docume nts stored under the copier and print er functi ons cann ot be do wn- loaded. Note ❒ Check print results of Document Server jobs in [ Status ] in [ J ob History ] . Reference For more information about displaying statu s and changing settings, see p.87 “ Usi[...]
-
Page 285
Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings 85 8 Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In the [ Addres s ] box, enter th e addres s (for ex ample ht - tp://XXX .XXX,XXX, XXX, whe re the Xs are the numbers of the IP address). The sta tus of t he mach ine you chose appears on the Web brows- er. C C [...]
-
Page 286
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 86 8 Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In the [ Addres s ] box, enter th e addres s (for ex ample ht - tp://XXX .XXX,XXX, XXX, whe re the Xs are the numbers of the IP address). The sta tus of t he mach ine you chose appears on the Web [...]
-
Page 287
Using Help on the Web Browser 87 8 Using Help on the Web Browse r When using Help f or the first time, clicki ng either [ Help ] in the header area or the icon marked "?" in the work area makes the following s creen appear. From ther e you can che ck Help in two different ways, as shown below: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Checki ng a Help Us ing the I[...]
-
Page 288
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 88 8[...]
-
Page 289
89 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view p rinter status a nd con- figure the network interface board us- ing telnet. Note ❒ You shou ld spec ify a p assw ord so only the network adm inistrator, or a person wi th network ad ministra- tor pri vilege s, can us e remot e mainte nance. ❒ The passwo rd is th e same as t hat used for [...]
-
Page 290
Appendix 90 9 Commands List Use the " help" c ommand to dis play remote maintena nce use. Note ❒ Enter “ help ” to display a list of commands that can be used. msh> h elp ❒ Enter “ help comman d_name ” to display information about the syn- tax of that command. msh> h elp command_n ame TCP/IP address Use the " ifconf[...]
-
Page 291
Remote Maintenance by telnet 91 9 - - - - Address ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Sub-net Mask A number us ed to numerical ly “ mask ” o r h i d e t h e I P a d d r e s s o n the network by eliminat ing those parts of the address that are alike for all machines on the network. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Broadcas t address A specified address for sending data to s pecific[...]
-
Page 292
Appendix 92 9 DHCP Use the "dhcp" comma nd to config- ure the DHCP settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reference The fo llo wing c omman d di splay s the current DHCP setting s. msh> dhc p ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configuration You can config ure the DH CP set- ting s. msh> dhc p interf ace_na me [on|of f] Note ❒ Sel ect [ on ] to enable DHCP. Se- l[...]
-
Page 293
Remote Maintenance by telnet 93 9 Printer st atus The foll owing co mmand can be used to get information about the current printer st atus: msh> comm and Note ❒ For more information about print jobs is displa yed when th e ID number i s added af ter the p rnlog command . Reference For more informat ion about the meaning of the data returne d u[...]
-
Page 294
Appendix 94 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display Shows SNMP informat ion and available protocols. msh> snm p ? The followin g command displays the settings of registered number specifi ed. msh> snmp [ re gistered_nu mber ] Omit ting the num ber di spla ys al l access set tings. msh> snm p [-p] Note ❒ Add “ -p ” (as above) to have the in form at[...]
-
Page 295
Remote Maintenance by telnet 95 9 The following is a sample configu- ration using the registra tion number 3 with the I PX address 7390A448, and th e MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65: msh> snm p 3 ipx 739 0A44 8: 00007 4625C 65 IPP Use the "ipp" command to configure IPP settings . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Viewing setting The fo llo wing c omman d [...]
-
Page 296
Appendix 96 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Setting timeou t You can specify the timeout inter- val in use when receiving data from the network . msh> dip rint [30~65 535] Note ❒ The default i s 300 seconds. ❒ If 0 is set, timeou t is disabled. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bidirectional configurat ion for the di- rect p rinting port Use this setting to configure wheth[...]
-
Page 297
Remote Maintenance by telnet 97 9 SLP Use the "slp" command to configure SLP sett ings. You can sear ch the NetWare ser ver using SLP in the Pure IP environment of NetWare5/5.1 , 6. Use th e "slp" command to configure the value of TTL used by the SLP multi-cast-p ack- et. Note ❒ The default value of TTL is “ 1 ” . A search[...]
-
Page 298
Appendix 98 9 ssid ID value You can set SS ID in infr astr uc ture mode. The ch aract ers tha t can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 by tes). SSID value is se t automatically to the nearest access point if the setting has not been made. If the set ting has not been made for ad hoc mode, the same valu e as for infr astr uc ture mode or an “ AS - SI[...]
-
Page 299
Remote Maintenance by telnet 99 9 Note ❒ When chang ing the interface to IEEE 802.11b, see p.90 “ TC P/IP address ” . ❒ When configur ing the I EEE 802.11b TCP/IP, see p.90 “ TCP/IP address ” . Job Spool Use th e "spoo lsw" co mman d to con- figure Job Spool settings. Limita tion ❒ You can only specify LPR, IP P, and SMB p r[...]
-
Page 300
Appendix 100 9 msh> w ins WINS Con figu rati on: inter face_ name : WINS: On primary server 0.0.0. 0 se conda ry se rver 0.0.0. 0 Sc opeI D C urren t con figura- tion: primary server 0.0.0. 0 se conda ry se rver 0.0.0. 0 h ostna me host _name ScopeI D Note ❒ If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address, the DHC P addre[...]
-
Page 301
Remote Maintenance by telnet 101 9 Note ❒ Priority assignment is use ful when connecting more than one interface to the machine. ❒ If an interface is not selected, the interface appears according to the currently set priority, re- gardless of m ultiple interface connectio ns. *1 Available when t he optiona l 802.11b int erface ki t is in stalle[...]
-
Page 302
Appendix 102 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ DNS server configurat ion The foll owing c ommand ena - bles/disables us e of the DNS serv- er address: msh> dn s n umber serv er / server addr ess The following is a sample configu- ratio n usi ng an IP addr ess of 192.168.15.16 on DNS 1 server: msh> dn s 1 se rver 192.1 68.15 .16 • You can regis ter up to th[...]
-
Page 303
Remote Maintenance by telnet 103 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ AppleT alk • Printer func tion using Apple- Talk under Maci ntos h Note ❒ This can be configured wh en a module suppor ting Po stScrip t 3 is installed in the machine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetWare • Printer func tion using N etWare server Note ❒ In a Pur eIP e nvironm ent, y ou can use only the [...]
-
Page 304
Appendix 104 9 Using DHCP You can use the printer in a DHCP en- vironment. You can also register the printer N etBIOS name on a WINS server when it is ru nning. If you connect an Ethernet interface and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface simultaneo usly, pay attention to the following: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a st atic IP a ddres s is se t for both int[...]
-
Page 305
Using DHCP 105 9 Note ❒ If a static address is not selected, or i s set to 0. 0.0.0, the inte rface using the addres s assigned by DHC P is us ed . Note ❒ Printers that register the p rinter NetBIO S name on a WINS serve r mus t be co nfigur ed for the WIN S server. See p.99 “ WINS ” . ❒ Support ed DHCP ser vers are Win- dows NT 4.0 Serve[...]
-
Page 306
Appendix 106 9 SNMP The machine is equ ipped with an SNMP (Simple Network Management Proto- col) agent that operates under UDP and IPX on the Ethernet/wireles s LAN in- terface, a nd UDP on the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface. Using the SNMP manager yo u can get inform ation about the ma chine. The def ault community names are “ public ” and[...]
-
Page 307
Single-line Messages on the Display Panel 107 9 Single-line Messages on the Display Panel This sec tion describes the most common net work-related messages t hat appear on the display panel. If a message not described here appears, act accord ing to that message. Messages witho ut Code Numbers Reference Before turning the main power off, see "[...]
-
Page 308
Appendix 108 9 Messages with Cod e Numbers Note ❒ A message reporting an error appea rs on the display panel as sh own. Message Causes Solutions Code numbers Cannot connect with DHCP Server. ( The DHCP server cannot be found. Check the DHCP s erver is running on the network. 101 201 301 IP Ad - dress is already in use. : The specified IP address [...]
-
Page 309
Single-line Messages on the Display Panel 109 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Code Numbers The problem interface is displayed. • 1XX: Ethernet • 2XX: IEEE 802.11b • 3XX: IEEE 1394 • 0XX: Independent of inte rface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Order of priority of me ssages (when multiple errors occ ur) Order of interface priori ty • 1.Ethernet • 2.IEEE 802.11b •[...]
-
Page 310
Appendix 110 9 Understanding Displayed Information This section descri bes how to read the status information returned by the net- work interface board. Print J ob In format ion Print job status can be viewed using the following c ommands: • telnet : Use the "status" command. See p.93 “ Printer stat us ” . Print L og In format ion T[...]
-
Page 311
Understanding Displayed Information 111 9 Machine St atus and Configur ation You can ch eck the mach ine status an d configurat ion using te lnet or UNIX. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ telnet Use the "info" or "status" comm and. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ UNIX Use the " lpr" or " lpstat " com mand, or "sta t", "i nfo&q[...]
-
Page 312
Appendix 112 9 Error: Memory Value A memory error has oc curred. Error: Parallel I/ F Board A parallel interfac e board error has occu rred. Error: USB Inte rface A USB interface b oard error has occ urred. Error: Wireless Card Wireless card is not inserted. Error: Wireless Card or Board A wireless card or wireless board error has oc- curred. Full:[...]
-
Page 313
Understanding Displayed Information 113 9 Misma tch: Paper Type I ndica ted paper t ray d oes not contain p aper of selec ted t ype. Auto Paper Select cannot d etect selected pap er size an d type. Nearly Full: Waste Toner Waste toner container is nearly full. Need more Bookl et Stap les Booklet staple r has a lmost ru n out of st aples. Need more [...]
-
Page 314
Appendix 114 9 Machin e configuration Note ❒ “ * ” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting. ❒ Regarding *1-*5, see table below. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *1 Input Tray : Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *2 Input Tray : Paper Size Item Descr iption Input Tray No. Name Paper Si ze Statu s ID number of the paper tr ay Name of the paper tray *1 Pape r size [...]
-
Page 315
Understanding Displayed Information 115 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *3 Input Tray : Status ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *4 Output Tray: Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *5 Output Tray: Status 11 × 8 1 / 2 LT L 5 1 / 2 × 8 1 / 2 HLT K 8 1 / 2 × 5 1 / 2 HLT L Custom Size Custom Size 10 1 / 2 × 7 1 / 4 Executive K 7 1 / 4 × 10 1 / 2 Executive L 8 1 / 4 × 13 Folio L 8 1 / 2 × 13 [...]
-
Page 316
Appendix 116 9 Configur ing the Network I nterface Board The network interface board settings can be displayed using the commands be- low. • telnet : Use the " show" command. See p.93 “ Network interface board config- uration settings information ” . Item na me Meaning Common Mode Prot oco l U p/Do wn Apple Talk TCP/I P NetW are SMB[...]
-
Page 317
Understanding Displayed Information 117 9 TCP/IP Mode ftp lpr rsh teln et diprint web http ftpc snmp ipp auton et Enca pType DHCP Add ress Netmask Broad cast Gate way AccessRange[ ✩ ] *2 Time se rver Time Zone Time server polling time SYSLOG serv er Home page URL Home page link name Help pag e URL SNMP protocol “ Up ” me ans ac tive , “ Dow[...]
-
Page 318
Appendix 118 9 SMB Switch Mode Direct print Notification Workgroup name Computer name Comment Share nam e[1] Prot oco l (this value is fixed) (this value is fixed) Notification of print job comp letion Name of the workgroup Name of the compu ter Comment Share name (name of the printer type) IEEE 802.11 b *3 Device name DHCP Dynamic Host Configurati[...]
-
Page 319
Understanding Displayed Information 119 9 *1 You can displa y these item names when i nstalling t he optional 1394 inter face board. *2 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 5. *3 You can di splay these item names when installi ng the opti onal 802.11b interface ki t. *4 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 3. Domain name ether i[...]
-
Page 320
Appendix 120 9 Message List This is a list of messa ges written to the machine's sy stem log. The sys tem log can be viewed using the "syslog" c ommand. System Log Info rmation You can use the following methods to view the system log: • telnet : Use the "syslog " command. See p.93 “ System log information ” . Mess age[...]
-
Page 321
Message List 121 9 Cannot find rprinter(<print server name>/<printer number>) Check the printer number regis tered in the print s erver. Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP addres s changes when DHCP LEAS E is renewed. To a lways assign t he same I P ad- dress, se t a st atic IP a ddress to the DH CP serv - er. child process exec[...]
-
Page 322
Appendix 122 9 Frametype =<frame type name> The <frame type name> is configured to be used on NetWare. httpd s tart. httpd has star ted. IEEE 802.11 b <Tran smissio n mode> m ode Trans missi on mode for IE EE 802.1 1b (Example: current mode is infrastructur e mod e.) IEEE 80 2.11b [infras tructu re] mode (Exam ple: curre nt mod e [...]
-
Page 323
Message List 123 9 inetd start. An inetd has starte d. <inte rface> sta rted with IP: <IP address> <IP addres s> has b een se t for <I nterfa ce> an d <Interface> started. <Interface>: Subnet overlap. Subnet from Netmask and the IP address you tri ed to set f or < Int erf ace > ov erl ap th e sub ne t of an[...]
-
Page 324
Appendix 124 9 Open log file <file name> (In print server mode) The specified log file has been ope ned. papd start. (AppleTalk) AppleTalk print service has started. permission denied. Job cancellation was determined to be u nau- thorized after checking the user name and host ad dress (ex cept for ROOT au thoriz ation) . phy release file open[...]
-
Page 325
Message List 125 9 smbd start. (NetBEUI) An smbd (SMB (Server Mess age Block) serv- ice) has started. Snmp over ip is ready. Communication over TCP/I P via SNMP is availa ble . Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready. Communication over IP over 13 94 via SNMP is available. Snmp over ipx is r eady. Communication over IPX via SNMP is availa- ble. snmpd start[...]
-
Page 326
Appendix 126 9 SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. Failed to connect the SMTP server. This could be be cau se: • There is no c onnection to the netwo rk. • The network configuration is inc orrect, so there is no response from the SMTP se rver. • The SMTP server name is incorrect. • The specified SMTP server is incorrect. • There is no s[...]
-
Page 327
Message List 127 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ LDAP error messages Note ❒ See the descrip tion correspondin g to the error mess age. The number in the error message is the RFC er ror number. LDAP errors appear thus: <Stat us>:< LDAP error mess age> • Stat us • ini t Error during LDAP initialization. • bind Error during LDAP binding. • sea[...]
-
Page 328
Appendix 128 9 No such attribu te(16) The requested att ribute does not exis t. Check the attribute settings. Undefined attribute typ e(17) The specified attribute is undefined. Inap propriate matc hing(18) The match is inapp ropr iate. Constraint violation(19) A constraint violation has occurred. Type or v alue exists(20) The specified attribute a[...]
-
Page 329
Message List 129 9 Can't contact LDAP server(81) Cannot contact the LDAP server. Check t he server is working and communicating prop- erly. Local error(82 ) A local program err or or an SASL authent i- cation error has occurred. Consult the net- work administra tor. Encoding error(83 ) An error occurred while encoding the mes- sage to be tran [...]
-
Page 330
Appendix 130 9 When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame Operating Environmen t The follo wing combina tions of oper- ating system and MetaFrame are sup - ported: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Serv- er E diti on • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3 • MetaFrame XP 1. 0 SP1/SP2/FR1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windo ws 2000 Se rver /A dvanced Serv[...]
-
Page 331
When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame 131 9 • When print ing a large number of bitmap images or us ing the serv er in a WAN envi ronmen t over dial-up lines su ch as ISDN, depending on th e data rat e, printing may be disabled or er- ro rs m ay occ ur. • When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or lat er vers ion s, we rec om- mend configurin g [ Cl[...]
-
Page 332
Appendix 132 9 Precautions Please pay attention to the follo wing when usin g the networ k inte rface board. When configuration is n eces- sary, fol low the ap propri ate proce- dures b elow . Connectin g a Dial -Up Ro uter to a Network When using NetWare (file server) If the NetWare file server and pr inter are on opposit e sides of a router, pack[...]
-
Page 333
Precautions 133 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d ial-up router is c onnected in a network envi ronment The settings for the delivery server to b e con nect ed m ust be m ade ap- propriately for the machine with Scan Route r V2 L ite/P rofes siona l, Auto Doc ument Link , or Des kTop- Binder V2 Lite/Pr ofessi onal . In ad- diti on, s et u p conn ecte d de[...]
-
Page 334
Appendix 134 9 Banner page You should not configure a banner page on Ne tWare. If you want to change the banner page setti ng, al- ways configure it using Windows. • Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Enable banne r ] check bo x on the [ Printe r Setti ngs ] tab in the printer properties dialog box . • Under Windows 2000/XP, clear the [ Enable[...]
-
Page 335
Precautions 135 9 When the Wireless LAN Boa rd (optio nal) Is Instal led When usin g the wi reless LAN in ter- face on the network, note the follow - ing: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When mov ing the machi ne Deta ch the antenn as w hen r eloca t- ing the machine locally. After moving th e machine, re at- tach the antenn as, ensuring that: • The antennas are[...]
-
Page 336
Appendix 136 9 Specifications *1 The 1394 int erface board suppor ts only TCP/IP . *2 Use the SmartNetM onitor for Clie nt port . *3 To use IPP under Windows XP, u se the Stand ard IPP port . *4 This can be used when the PostScr ipt 3 module is inst alled. *5 Under Windows, th is function can be used with TCP/I P and NetBEUI. *6 SMB u sing N etB EU[...]
-
Page 337
137 INDEX A Access Control , 91 access type , 94 AutoNet , 10 0 , 105 B Bidirectional SCSI print , 37 Broadcast addre ss , 91 C Cha nne l , 37 Commun ication M ode , 37 commun ity name , 94 config uration access type , 94 community name , 94 Networ k Int erface Board co nfig uratio n , 116 Web Bro wser , 81 D Delivery Optio n , 38 DHCP , 92 , 104 d[...]
-
Page 338
138 GB GB EN USA B654 -8640 R remot e main tena nce telne t , 89 Return to Defaults , 38 ROUTE , 96 S Scanner Recall Interval Time , 42 SCSI print (SBP-2) , 37 SLP , 97 SmartNetMoni tor for Client , 134 SMB , 96 SMTP Server , 39 SNMP , 93 , 10 6 specification s , 136 SPRINT , 97 SSID Setti ng , 37 subne t mask , 91 syste m Lo g , 12 0 syste m log i[...]
-
Page 339
Copyri ght © 2003[...]
-
Page 340
Network Guide GB GB EN USA B654-8640[...]
-
Page 341
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =128 // Print sc ale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 5.12 0000 mm Operatin g Instru ction s Copy Referen ce For saf e and correct use of th is machi ne, pl ease b e sure to read the Safet y Inf ormation in the "G[...]
-
Page 342
Type for DSm635/LD135/Aficio 2035e Type for DSm645/LD145/Aficio 2045e Printed in China AE AE B138-6608[...]
-
Page 343
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Important Contents of this manual a[...]
-
Page 344
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the fol lowing symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. c means STAND BY. Trademark Acrobat ® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Other product names used herein are for identificatio n purposes only and might be trademarks of thei r respective companies. We disclaim [...]
-
Page 345
i Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note r Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. r Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssary to view the man uals as a PDF file. r Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 "Operati[...]
-
Page 346
ii v Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility incl uded on the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner Driver & Document Ma nagement Utilities". • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displa[...]
-
Page 347
iii What You Can Do with This Machine 2-sided 2 P ages 2-sided 1 P age (see p .47 " 2 Sided 4 P ages Combine 2 Side") Front Front Back Back Front Back Front Back T ypes of Duplex Copies 1-sided 4 P ages 2-sided 1 P age (see p .47 " 1 Sided 4 P ages Combine 2 Side") 2-sided 4 P ages 2-sided 1 P age (see p .47 " 2 Sided 8 P a[...]
-
Page 348
iv Copying Book Originals 1-sided 4 P ages Booklet (see p .50 " 1 Sided Booklet") 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Open to Left 3 1 Open to Right 3 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 2-sided 2 P ages Booklet (see p .50 " 2 Sided Booklet") Open to Left Open to Right Open to Left Open to Right 1-sided Magazine (see p .50 " 1 Sided Magazine") 2 1 8 7 8 7 [...]
-
Page 349
v Combining Multiple P ages onto a Single P age (see p.45 " One-Sided Combine") 1-sided 2 P ages 1-sided 1 P age 2-sided 1 P age 1-sided 1 P age 1-sided 4 P ages 1-sided 1 P age 2-sided 2 P ages 1-sided 1 P age 1-sided 8 P ages 1-sided 1 P age Bound Originals 1-sided P ages Bound Originals 2-sided P ages F ront/Bac k Bound Originals 2-sid[...]
-
Page 350
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ........................................ i What You Can Do with This Machine ............................................................ ...... iii How to Read This Manual ........................................................ ...........................[...]
-
Page 351
vii Positive/Negative ........ .............. .............. .............. ................. .............. .............. ...... 55 Erase ................... .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ... 55 Margin Adjustment ................. .............. .............. ............[...]
-
Page 352
viii[...]
-
Page 353
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially h azardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine withou t following the in - structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de- scribed i[...]
-
Page 354
2 Machine Types This machine comes in tw o models which vary by copy speed. To ma ke sure which model you have, see the insi de front cover of this manual. Type 1 Type 2 Copy speed 35 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K ) 45 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K )[...]
-
Page 355
3 Functions that Require Options The available funct ions depend on your machine configuration and which op- tions you have. See the table below. m Required options *1 The bridge unit and paper tray unit are required when you install the finisher. Functions Batch mode SADF Auto Docu ment Feeder M ixed Size mod e Shift Sort Shift Stack Staple Saddle[...]
-
Page 356
4 Control Panel Note r This illustration sh ows the control panel of the ma chine with options fully in- stalled. 1. Screen Contrast knob Adjusts the brightness of the display pan- el. 2. Indicators Shows errors and machine status. • d : Add Staple indicator • D : Add Toner indicator • B : Load Paper indicator • L : Service Call indicator ?[...]
-
Page 357
5 12. { Sample Copy } key Use this key to make a single sample copy before starting a long copy run. By checking the sample copy and making any necessary changes to the image qual- ity settings before you make multiple copies, you can save time and paper. See p.33 “Sample copy”. 13. { Start } key Press to start copying. Press to start scan- nin[...]
-
Page 358
6 Display Panel Note r The following illustrati ons are examples for the machine with the optional 2 Tray finisher and Large Capa city Tray (LCT) installed. v Initial copy display 1. Original mode, Image Density and Special Original mode. 2. Operational status or messages. 3. You can register up to three fre- quently used reduce/enlarge ratios othe[...]
-
Page 359
7 1. Placing Originals Originals Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals v Metric versi on v Inch version Note r About 80 originals can be placed in the Auto Document Fee der (ADF). r The weight range for or igina ls in the Mixed Size mode is 52–81 g/m 2 , 13.8– 21.5 lb. Non-compatible originals fo r the Auto Document Feeder Placing the foll[...]
-
Page 360
Placing Originals 8 1 • Curled, folded, or creased originals • Pasted originals • Originals with any kind of coating, su ch as thermal fax pa per, art paper, alu- minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper • Originals with perforated lines • Originals with indexes, tags, or ot her projecting parts • Sticky originals such as transluce[...]
-
Page 361
Originals 9 1 v Exposure glass v ADF Note r When you copy custom size originals, make sure you specify the size of the originals. If not, the image may not be copied properly. See p.14 “Placing cus- tom size originals”. Sizes difficult to detect It is difficult for the machine to detect th e sizes of the following originals, so se- lect the pap[...]
-
Page 362
Placing Originals 10 1 Placing Originals Note r Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking this precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that will be cop- ied onto paper. Reference For original sizes you can set, see p.7 “Originals” . Original Orientation You can set the original o[...]
-
Page 363
Placing Originals 11 1 A Press [ Special Original ] . B Select the original orientation. Standard orientation A Make sure that is select- ed. 90 ° turn A Place your original in the land- scape orientation, a nd then press . C Press [ OK ] . Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass A Lift the exposure glass cover or ADF. Important r Do not lift the [...]
-
Page 364
Placing Originals 12 1 Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder Settings should be made in the fol- lowing situations: v When placing originals one by one: p.13 “SADF mode” v When placing originals consisting of more than 80 pages: p.12 “Batch mode” v When copying originals of various sizes: p.13 “Mixed size mode” v When placing cu[...]
-
Page 365
Placing Originals 13 1 B Select [ Batch ] , and then press [ OK ] . Note r When [ Batch ] is not displayed, change the settings. See p.101 “Switch to Batch (SAD F)”. C Place the first part of the original, and then press the { Start } key. D After the first part of the original has been fed, place the next part. E When the Sort, Combine or 1 Si[...]
-
Page 366
Placing Originals 14 1 A Press [ Special Original ] . B Press [ Mixed Size ] , and then press [ OK ] . C Align the rear and left edges of the originals as shown. 1. Place into the ADF 2. Vertical size D Adjust the guide to the widest original size. E Place the aligned originals fa ce up into the ADF. F Press the { Start } key. Placing custom size o[...]
-
Page 367
15 2. Copying Basic Procedure A If the machine has user codes set, enter a user code (up to eight dig- its) using the number keys, and then press the { # } key. The machine is re ady to copy. Reference For users codes, see “Key Oper- ator Tools”, General Settings Guide . B Make sure " d Ready" appears on the display. If any other func[...]
-
Page 368
Copying 16 2 Interrupt Copy Use this function if you want to inter- r u p t a l o n g c o p y j ob t o m ak e u r g e n tl y needed copies. Limitation r You cannot use the Interru pt Copy function when fax orig inals are be- ing scanned or the scanner func- tion is being used. A Press the { Interrupt } key. The Interrupt indicator goes on. When the[...]
-
Page 369
Basic Procedure 17 2 Job Preset You can set up the next copy content during copying. If a long copy job is in progress and y o u d o n o t w a n t t o w a i t f o r i t t o f i n - ish, you can use this function to set up the next copy job in advance. When the current copy job is finished, the next job will start automatically. A Press [ Next Job ][...]
-
Page 370
Copying 18 2 Copying from the Bypass Tray Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu- cent paper, postcards and copy paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays. Preparation When the duplex unit is attached, the default is [ 1 Sided → 2 Sided ] . When copying from the bypass tray, select [ 1 Sided ] for copyi[...]
-
Page 371
Copying from the Bypass Tray 19 2 Note r If the guides are not flush against the copy paper, images might be skewed or paper mis- feeds might occur. r Do not stack paper over the lim- it mark, otherwise images might be skewed or paper mis- feeds might occur. r Swing out the ext ender to sup- port paper sizes larger than A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11&[...]
-
Page 372
Copying 20 2 When copying onto special paper A Press the { # } key. B Select paper type in Special pa- per. C Press [ OK ] . D Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Note r When copying onto OHP trans- parencies, remove copied sheets one by one. E When your copy job is finished, press the { Clear Modes } key to clear the settings.[...]
-
Page 373
Copier Functions 21 2 Copier Functions Adjusting Image Density There are three t ypes of adjustment available: v Auto Image Density The machine automatically adjusts image density. v Manual image density You can adjust the density of the overall original in seven incre- ments. v Combined auto and manual image density Use when copying originals with[...]
-
Page 374
Copying 22 2 Selecting Original Type Setting Select one of the following s ix types to match your orig inals: v Text Select this mode when your origi- nals contain only text (no pictures). v Text/Photo Select [ Text/Photo ] when your origi- nals contain photographs or pic- tures with te xt. v Photo Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be [...]
-
Page 375
Copier Functions 23 2 Selecting Copy Paper There are two ways to select copy paper: v Auto Paper Select The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on orig- inal size and reproduction ratio. v Manual Paper Select Choose the tray con taining the paper yo u want to copy onto: a paper tray, by- pass tray or LCT. Reference p.9[...]
-
Page 376
Copying 24 2 Auto Paper Select A Make sure that [ Auto Paper Select ] is selected. Note r Trays with a key mark will not be auto matically selected. See “Paper Type” in “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide . Manual Paper Select A Select the paper tray, bypass tray or the LCT. The indicator correspond ing to the se lected paper tray[...]
-
Page 377
Copier Functions 25 2 - Rotated copy If the orientation in which your original is placed ( L or K ) is differen t from that of the paper you are copying onto, this funct ion rotates the original image by 90 ° to fit it on the copy pape r. This fun ction works when Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected. See p.23 “Auto Paper Select?[...]
-
Page 378
Copying 26 2 Preset Reduce/Enlarge You can select a preset ratio for copy- ing. v Base Point The base point of Redu ce/Enlarge differs depending on how the orig- inal is scanned. When the original is placed on the exposure glass, the upper left corner will be the base point. When it is placed in the ADF, the bottom left corner will be the base poin[...]
-
Page 379
Copier Functions 27 2 A Press [ Create Margin ] displayed on the initial display. B If you do not want to combine it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Zoom You can change the re production ra- tio in increments of 1%. Note r You can also select a preset ratio near the desired ratio using [ Re-[...]
-
Page 380
Copying 28 2 Auto Reduce/Enlarge The machine can choose an appropri- ate reproduction ra tio based on the paper and original sizes you select. Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. r When using Auto Reduce/En- large, see the following table for original sizes and orientations you can use: v Metric version v Inch version Referenc[...]
-
Page 381
Copier Functions 29 2 B Press [ Specifd. Ratio ] . C Make sure that [ Specifd. Ratio ] is highlighted. D Enter the length of the original with the numb er keys, and then press the [ # ] key. Note r You can enter sizes within the following ranges: E Enter the length of the copy with the number keys, and then press [ # ] . Note r To change the length[...]
-
Page 382
Copying 30 2 C Press [ Vertical ] . D Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, followed by [ # ] . E Press [ OK ] . To specify a ratio with [ n ] and [ o ] A Press [ With no ] . B Press [ Horizontal ] . C Adjust the ratio using [ n ] or [ o ] . Note r Pressing [ n ] or [ o ] changes the ratio in increments of 1%. Pressing and holding down [ n [...]
-
Page 383
Copier Functions 31 2 A Press [ Reduce/Enlarge ] . B Press [ Specifd. Ratio ] . C Press [ Dir. Size Mag mm ] . D Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then press [ # ] . E Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, and then press [ # ] . F Enter the vertical size of the origi- nal with the number keys,[...]
-
Page 384
Copying 32 2 v Shift Sort • 1000-Sheet finisher (optional ) E a c h t i m e t h e c o p i e s o f o n e s e t or those of each job are deliv- ered, the next copy is shifted when delivered so you can sep- arate each set or job. • 2 Tray finisher (optional) The shift tray moves backward or forward each time the copies of one set or those of each [...]
-
Page 385
Copier Functions 33 2 C Place your originals. Note r When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied. When placing an original in the A DF, set so the first page is on th e top. r When placing an original on the exposure glas s or in the ADF u s- ing Batch mode, press the { # } key after all the originals have[...]
-
Page 386
Copying 34 2 C Enter the number of copy sets with the numb er keys, and then press the { # } key. Note r The number of sets you can en- ter differs depending on when the { Clear/Stop } key is pressed. D Press [ Continue ] . Copying starts again. Stack Copies can be assembled with each page placed. • 1000-Sheet finisher (optional) Each time the co[...]
-
Page 387
Copier Functions 35 2 Staple An optional finisher and the bridge un it are required for this function. Each copy set can be stapled together. Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this functi on. Reference Related initial settings p.102 “Select Stapling Position” Stapling position and original setting Place all the originals in the ADF in [...]
-
Page 388
Copying 36 2 Bottom K L Left 2 K *2 L Top 2 K L *2 Original location Stapling position *1 Exposure glass ADF STAPLECE STAPLE25 STAPLE27 STAPLE28 STAPLE30 STAPLEDE STAPLEEE ST APLE22AD A ST APLE24AD A ST APLE10AD A ST APLE20AD A[...]
-
Page 389
Copier Functions 37 2 v 2 Tray finisher Original location Stapling position *1 Exposure glass ADF Top K L Top Slant K L Bottom K L Left 2 K *2 L STAPLEAE STAPLEBE STAPLECE STAPLE25 STAPLE26 STAPLE27 STAPLE28 STAPLE29 STAPLE30 STAPLEDE[...]
-
Page 390
Copying 38 2 v Booklet finisher Top 2 K L *2 Original location Stapling position *1 Exposure glass ADF Top K L Bottom K L Original location Stapling position *1 Exposure glass ADF STAPLEEE ST APLE22AD A ST APLE23AD A ST APLE24ADA ST APLE10AD A ST APLE14AD A ST APLE20ADA STAPLEAE STAPLECE STAPLE25 STAPLE26 STAPLE27 STAPLE28 STAPLE29 STAPLE30[...]
-
Page 391
Copier Functions 39 2 *1 This table shows the stapling positions, not the orientation of delivery. *2 Not available for A3 and B4 JIS size paper. Left 2 K *2 L Top 2 K L *2 Saddle Stitch L K Original location Stapling position *1 Exposure glass ADF STAPLEDE STAPLEEE ST APLE22AD A ST APLE23AD A ST APLE24ADA ST APLE10AD A ST APLE14AD A ST APLE20ADA S[...]
-
Page 392
Copying 40 2 A Select one of the stapling positions. v 1000-Sheet finisher v 2 Tray finisher v Booklet finisher Note r When you select the stapli ng position, Sort mode is automatically selected. Reference p.35 “Stapling position and original setting” B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys. C Place your originals, a nd then press [...]
-
Page 393
Copier Functions 41 2 Punch The optional 2 Tray finisher and the bridge unit are re quired for this function. You can make punch holes in copies. v 2 holes v 3 holes v 4 holes Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this functi on. r The relationship between th e orientation in which you place the original and the punch hole positions is as foll[...]
-
Page 394
Copying 42 2 v Punch hole positions *1 This table shows the punch hole positi ons, not the orientation of delivery. Original location Punch hole positions *1 Exposure glass ADF Standard 2 holes K L 3 holes K L 4 holes K L 90º Turn 2 holes K L 3 holes K L 4 holes K L[...]
-
Page 395
Copier Functions 43 2 A Select one of the punch hole positions. B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys. C Place your originals, a nd then press the { Start } key. Duplex There are three types of duple x. v 1 Sided → 2 Sided Copies 2 one-sided pages on 1 two- sided page. v 2 Sided → 2 Sided Copies 1 two-sided page on 1 two- sided p[...]
-
Page 396
Copying 44 2 Original orientation and co mpleted copies The resulting copy image will differ according t o the orien tation in wh ich you place your originals (vertical K or horizontal L ). *1 The table shows the orientation of im- ages on the front and back of copies, not the orientation of delivery. Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this[...]
-
Page 397
Copier Functions 45 2 r When placing an original on the exposure glas s or in the ADF u s- ing Batch mode, press the { # } key after all the originals have been scanned. Originals and copy orientation You can select the orientation. •T o p t o T o p • Top to Bottom Note r You can change the default orien- tation with User Tools. See p.92 “Cop[...]
-
Page 398
Copying 46 2 Open to top S originals v Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF) • Originals read from left to right • Originals read from top to bot- tom Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. Reference Related initial settings p.96 “Erase Origin al Shadow in Combine” p.98 “Copy Order in Combine” p.97 “Separa[...]
-
Page 399
Copier Functions 47 2 Two-Sided Combine Combines vario us pages of origin als into one sheet with two sid es. v 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Side Copies 4 one-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side. v 1 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 2 Side Copies 8 one-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per s ide. 1. Front 2. Back v 1 Sided 16 [...]
-
Page 400
Copying 48 2 v 2 Sided 16 Pages → Combine 2 Side Copies 8 two-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side . Reference Related initial settings p.45 “Orientation of t he original and image pos ition of combine” p.96 “Erase Original Shadow in Combine” p.98 “Copy Order in Combine” p.97 “Separation Line in Com- bine” A Pres[...]
-
Page 401
Copier Functions 49 2 v Book → 2 Sided Copies a two-page spread or iginal onto one sheet with one page per side. v Front&Back → 2 Sided Copies each two-page spread orig- inal as it is onto both sides of a sheet. Note r See the following table for orig- inal and copy paper sizes when using a 100% ratio. v Metric version v Inch version A Pres[...]
-
Page 402
Copying 50 2 Booklet/Magazine Copies two or more originals in page order. v 1 Sided → Booklet Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown. v Open to left v Open to right v 2 Sided → Booklet Make two-sided originals to copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown. v Open to left v Open to right v 1 Sided → Magazine Copies two[...]
-
Page 403
Copier Functions 51 2 v 2 Sided → Magazine Copies two or more originals of two-sided to make copies in page order when they are folded and stacked. v Open to left v Open to right How to fold and unfold copies to make a booklet 1. Open to left 2. Open to right How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine Note r You cannot use the bypass tray w[...]
-
Page 404
Copying 52 2 E Select [ 1 Sided → Booklet ] , [ 2 Sided → - Booklet ] , [ 1 Sided → Magazine ] or [ 2 Sided → Magazine ] , and then pr ess [ OK ] . F Press [ OK ] . G Select the paper. H Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Note r When placing an original on the exposure glas s or in the ADF u s- ing Batch mode, press the[...]
-
Page 405
Copier Functions 53 2 E Press [ OK ] . F Press [ OK ] . G Place your original, and then press the { Start } key. Double Copies One original image is copied twice on one copy as shown . Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. r See the following table for origina l and copy paper sizes when using a 100% ratio: v Metric version v In[...]
-
Page 406
Copying 54 2 Centring You can make copies with the image moved to the centre. Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. r The original sizes and orientations for centring are listed below. v Metric version v Inch version A Select the paper. B Press [ Edit/Stamp ] . C Press [ Edit Image ] . D Press [ Centring ] . E Press [ OK ] . F P[...]
-
Page 407
Copier Functions 55 2 Positive/Negative If your original is black and white , copy images are invert ed. A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Edit I mage ] . C Press [ Positive/N egative ] . D Press [ OK ] . E Press [ OK ] . F Select the paper. G Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Erase This function erases the centre and/or all[...]
-
Page 408
Copying 56 2 v Centre/Border This mode erases both the ce ntre and edge margins of the original image. Reference The erase width is set to 10 mm (0.4”) as a default. You can change this setting with User Tools. p.96 “Erase Centre Width” p.96 “Erase Border Width” Note r The relationship bet ween the orig- inal orientatio n and the er ased [...]
-
Page 409
Copier Functions 57 2 Selecting [ Diff. Width ] A Press [ Diff. Width ] . B Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase border width with [ n ] and [ o ] . C Press [ OK ] . D Press [ OK ] . E Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Centre erase A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Erase ] . C Press [ Centre ] . D[...]
-
Page 410
Copying 58 2 Selecting [ Diff. Width ] A Press [ Diff. Width ] . B Press the key for the part you want to change, and then set an erase margin width with [ n ] and [ o ] . C Press [ OK ] . E Press [ OK ] . F Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Margin Adjustment You can shift the image to the left, r i g h t , t o p , o r b o t t[...]
-
Page 411
Copier Functions 59 2 F Press [ OK ] . G Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Background Numbering Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies. It can help you to keep track of conf i- dential documents. Note r You can enter a number between 1 and 999. Reference Related initial settings p.98 “Size” p[...]
-
Page 412
Copying 60 2 Stamp position and or iginal orientation Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. r Only one message can be stamped each time. Reference p.98 “Stamp Language” p.98 “Stamp Position” p.99 “Stamp Format” A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Stamp ] . C Press [ Preset Stamp ] . D Select the de sired me ssage. E [...]
-
Page 413
Copier Functions 61 2 Stamp position and or iginal orientation Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. r Only one message can be stamped each time. Reference Related initial settings p.99 “Stamp Position 1 - 4” p.99 “Stamp Format 1 - 4” A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Stamp ] . C Press [ User Stamp ] . D Select the sta[...]
-
Page 414
Copying 62 2 A Make sure that the machine is in copier mode. B Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. C Press [ Copier/Document Server Fea- tures ] . D Press [ Stamp ] . E Press [ User Stamp ] . F Press [ Program/Delete Stamp ] . G Press [ Program ] , and then press the stamp number (1–4) you want to program. Note r Stamp numbers with m already ha[...]
-
Page 415
Copier Functions 63 2 C Press [ Copier/Document Server Fea- tures ] . D Press [ Stamp ] . E Press [ User Stamp ] . F Press [ Program/Delete Stamp ] . G Press [ Delete ] , and then press the stamp number you want to delete. H Select [ Delete ] , and then press [ Ex- it ] . I Press [ Exit ] . The display returns to th e Copi- er/Document Server Featu[...]
-
Page 416
Copying 64 2 Note r You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. Reference Related initial settings p.100 “Font” p.100 “Size” p.100 “Superimpose” p.100 “Stamp Position” “Timer Settings”, General Setti ngs Guide A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Stamp ] . C Press [ Date Stamp ] . D Press [ All Pages ] or [ 1st Page only ][...]
-
Page 417
Copier Functions 65 2 Page Numbering Use this function to print page num- bers on your copies. There are six types of Page Number- ing (n is the total number of pages in your original): • P1, P2,…Pn • 1/n, 2/n,...n/n • -1-, -2-,...-n- • P.1, P.2 ...P.n •1 , 2 … n • 1-1, 1-2,..1-n Stamp position and original orientation Note r You ca[...]
-
Page 418
Copying 66 2 A Press [ Edit/Sta mp ] . B Press [ Stamp ] . C Press [ Page Numbering ] . D Select the format. Note r You can specify the stamp posi- tion, pages to be stamped, and numbering. See p.66 “Changing the stamp position” and p.66 “Specifying the first printing page and start number”. E After you specify all desired set- tings, press[...]
-
Page 419
Copier Functions 67 2 Note r The example below shows when the first printing page is “2 ” and the st a rt number is “3”. D Press [ Last Number ] , enter the number of the page at which to stop numbering with the number keys, and then press the { # } key. Note r If y ou wa nt t o n um ber al l pa ge s to the end, press [ to the end ] . E Whe[...]
-
Page 420
Copying 68 2 E Press [ Total Pages ] , enter the total number of original pages with the number keys, and then press the { # } key. F When page designation is com- plete, press [ OK ] . Note r To change the settin gs after pressing [ OK ] , press [ Change ] , and then enter the numbers again. If you selected (1-1, 1-2 ,…) A Press [ Change ] on th[...]
-
Page 421
Copier Functions 69 2 v Front cover The first page of your originals is copied on specific pape r sheet for covers, or a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy. •C o p y •B l a n k v Front/Back covers The first and last pages of your original are copied on specific pa- per for use as covers. •C o p y •B l a n k Reference p.97 “Fron[...]
-
Page 422
Copying 70 2 Note r The slip sheets should be t he same size and orientation as the copy pa- per. r You cannot place the copy paper in the bypass tray. r You can specify the pages up to 20. A Press [ Cover/Slip Sheet ] . B Press [ Desig./Chapter ] . C Press the key to select the chapter number. D Enter the page number of the original's locatio[...]
-
Page 423
Copier Functions 71 2 G When page designation is com- plete, press [ OK ] . H Place your originals, and then press the { Start } key. Slip Sheets Using this function, you can insert a slip sheet between OHP transparen- cies or stacks. You can also print on the inserted slip sheet. Preparation Before selecting this function, specify the paper tray f[...]
-
Page 424
Copying 72 2 Storing Data in the Document Server The Document Server ena bles you to store documents in the memory and print them as you want. Important r Data stored in the machine might b e l o s t i f s o m e k i n d o f f a i l u r e o c - curs. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage that might result from the loss o f data. N[...]
-
Page 425
Programs 73 2 Programs You can store frequently used copy job settings in the mach ine memory and recall them for future use. Storing a Program Note r You can store up t o 10 programs. r You can select the standard mode or program No. 10 as the mode to be set when modes are cle ared or reset, or immediately af ter the op- eration switch is turned o[...]
-
Page 426
Copying 74 2 F Press [ OK ] . When the settings are successfully stored, m appears on the left side and the program name appears on the right side of the registered pro- gram number. The display returns to the initial copy display for a while. Changing a Stored Program A Check the program settings. Note r When you wan t to check t he contents of a [...]
-
Page 427
75 3. Troubleshooting If Your Machine Does Not Operate As You Want When a Message Is Displayed The following chart contains explanatio ns for the common messages. If other messages appear, follow the instru ctions as they are displayed. Note r For messages that are not li sted here, see General Settings Guide . Message Causes Solutions Cannot detec[...]
-
Page 428
Troubleshooting 76 3 Duplex is not avi- lable with this paper size. A paper size not available in Duplex mode has been selected. The following paper sizes are avail- able for Duplex m ode: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 L . Select one of these size s. Maximum number of sets is *. The number of copies ex- ceeds the maximum copy quantity. Y[...]
-
Page 429
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies 77 3 If You Cannot Make Clear Copies Problem Causes Solutions Copies appear dirty. Image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.21 “Adjusting Image Density”. Auto Image Density is not selected. Adjust the auto density. See p.21 “Adjusting Image Density”. The reverse side of an orig- inal image i[...]
-
Page 430
Troubleshooting 78 3 If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want This section explains causes and remedies when copy results are not as expe ct- ed. v Basic Problem Causes Solutions Copies are not stapled. Th ere are jammed staples in the stapler. Remove jamme d staples. See Gener- al Settings Guide . Note r After removing jammed staple s, staples might [...]
-
Page 431
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want 79 3 v Edit v Stamp Problem Causes Solutions In Double Co pies mode, parts of the original image are not copied. Combination of original and copy paper is not cor- rect. Select A3 L for A4 K originals and A4 for A5 originals. In Border, Centre, or Cen- tre/Border mode, parts of the original image are not copied[...]
-
Page 432
Troubleshooting 80 3 v Combine v Duplex Problem Causes Solutions You cannot make a bo ok from Booklet or Magazine mode by folding copies. You selected a setting (“Open to left”or “Open to right”) that does not match the orientation of originals. Change the setting. When using Combine, parts of the imag e are not copied. You specified a repr[...]
-
Page 433
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want 81 3 When Memory Is Full Note r If you set [ Memory Full Auto Scan Res tart ] in User Tools (see p.101 “Memory Full Auto Scan Restart” ) to [ Yes ] , even if the memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make copies of the scanned originals first, then automati[...]
-
Page 434
Troubleshooting 82 3[...]
-
Page 435
83 4. User Tools (Copier/Document Server Features) User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features) User Tools Item Names Default General Feat ures 1/4 (See p.90 “General Features 1 / 4 ”.) Auto Paper Select Pr iority ON Auto Tray Switching With image rotation Paper Display Display Original Type Priority Text Original Type Display Display Auto[...]
-
Page 436
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 84 4 General Feat ures 3/4 (See p.93 “General Features 3 / 4 ”.) Copy Function Key: F1–F5 • F1: 1 Sided → 2 Sided: T to T • F2: 2 Sided: T to T → 2 Sided: T to T • F3: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com- bine • F4: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com- bine: 4 originals • F5: Create Margin General Features [...]
-
Page 437
User Tools Menu (Copier/Doc ument Server Features) 85 4 Reproduction Ra tio 2/2 (S ee p.94 “R eproduction Ratio 2 / 2 ”.) Reduce 1–6 Metric version •Reduce 1: 25% •Reduce 2: 50% •Reduce 3: 65% •Reduce 4: 71% •Reduce 5: 75% •Reduce 6: 82% Inch version •Reduce 1: 25% •Reduce 2: 50% •Reduce 3: 65% •Reduce 4: 73% •Reduce 5: [...]
-
Page 438
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 86 4 Edit 2/2 (See p.96 “Edit 2 / 2 ”.) Image Repeat Separation Line None Double Copies Separation Line None Separation Line in Combine None Copy on Designating Paper Yes Front Cover Copy in Combine Com bine Copy on Designating Page in Combine Combine Orientaion: Booklet, Magazine Open to Left Copy [...]
-
Page 439
User Tools Menu (Copier/Doc ument Server Features) 87 4 Date Stamp Format Metric version: DD/MM/YYYY Inch version: MM/DD/YYYY Font Font 1 Stamp Position Metric version • Position: Top left • Top Margin: 8 mm • Left Marg in: 32 mm Inch version • Position: Top left • Top Margin: 0.3" • Left Marg in: 0.8" Stamp Setting All Pages [...]
-
Page 440
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 88 4 Page Numbering Stamp Format P1, P2. .. Font Font 1 Size Auto Duplex Back Page Stamping Position Opposite Position Page Numbering in Combine Per original Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet No Stamp Position Metric version • Position P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: Top right -1-, 1-1: Bottom centre • Top/Bottom Ma[...]
-
Page 441
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 89 4 Accessing User Tools (Copier/Document Server Features) This section is for key operators in charge of this machine. You can change or set defaults. Note r B e s u r e t o q u i t U s e r T o o l s a n d r e - turn to the initial copy display af- ter all the settings are finished. This sec[...]
-
Page 442
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 90 4 General Features 1 / 4 v Auto Paper Select Priority As a default, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can cancel this set- ting. See p.23 “Selecting Copy Pa- per”. Note r Default: Yes v Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the sa me size in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts[...]
-
Page 443
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 91 4 v Auto Image Density Priority Set this function to use Au to Image Density when the power is turned on, reset or modes are cleared. Note r Default: Text: On, Text/Photo: On, Photo: Off, Pale: On, Genera- tion Copy: On v Copy Quality You can adjust the quality level of copies for each of t[...]
-
Page 444
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 92 4 General Features 2 / 4 v Duplex Mode Priority You can select the type of Duplex function effective when the ma- chine is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared. Note r Default: Text: Normal, Text/Pho- to: Normal, Photo: Normal, Pale: Normal, Generation Copy: Normal v Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode[...]
-
Page 445
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 93 4 General Features 3 / 4 v Copy Function Key: F1-F5 You can assign frequently used functions to function keys F1 to F5. Note r Default: • Copy Function Key: F 1: 1 Sided → 2 Sided: T to T • Copy Function Key: F2: 2 Sid- ed: T to T → 2 Sided: T to T • Copy Function Key: F 3: 1 Side[...]
-
Page 446
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 94 4 Reproduction Ratio 1 / 2 v Shortcut R/E You can register up to three fre- quently used Reduce/Enlarge ra- tios other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial display. You can also change registere d Re- duce/Enlarge ratios. If no Redu ce/Enlarge ratio ha s been set whe[...]
-
Page 447
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 95 4 v Priority Setting: Reduce You can set the ratio with prio rity when [ Reduce/Enlarge ] is pressed, followed by [ Reduce ] . Note r Default: •M e t r i c v e r s i o n : 71% • Inch version: 73% v Ratio for Create Margin You can set a Redu ce/Enlarge ra- tio when registering Create Mar[...]
-
Page 448
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 96 4 v 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT In 1 sided → 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side. The margin is set to the same value of “Back Margin: Left/Right”. Note r Default: •M e t r i c v e r s i o n : Right 5 mm • Inch version: Right 0.2" v 1 Sided → 2[...]
-
Page 449
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 97 4 v Double Copies Separation Line You can select a separation line in Double Copies mode from None, Solid, Broken A, Br oken B, or Crop Marks. •N o n e • Solid •B r o k e n A •B r o k e n B • Crop Marks Note r Default: None v Separation Line in Combine You can select a separation [...]
-
Page 450
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 98 4 v Orientation: Booklet, Magazine You can select the orien tation of copies to open when using Booklet or Magazine mode. Note r Default: Open to Left Reference p.51 “How to fold and unfold copies to make a booklet” p.51 “How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine” v Copy Order in Combi[...]
-
Page 451
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 99 4 v Stamp Format You can adjust the size, density, and print page for the stamp. •S i z e You can set the size of the stamp. Note r Default: 1X •D e n s i t y You can set the pattern used to print the stamp. Note r Default: Normal r Normal: The stamp is print- ed on the image. You ca nn[...]
-
Page 452
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 100 4 v Font You can select the Date Stamp font. Note r Default: Font 1 r This setting is linked with Page Numbering. v Stamp Position You can set the position at which the stamp is printed. Press the arrow keys to adjust the position. Note r Default: •M e t r i c v e r s i o n : • Position: Top lef[...]
-
Page 453
Accessing User Tools (Copier /Document Server Features) 101 4 v Stamp Position P1, P2... Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5... Stamp Position: – 1–, –2–... Stamp Position: P.1, P.2... Stamp Position: 1, 2... Stamp Position: 1–1, 1–2... You can set the position at which the stamp is printed. Press the arrow keys to adjust the position. v Superimpo[...]
-
Page 454
User Tools (Copier/Docum ent Server Features) 102 4 Note r If you select [ No ] : • When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray. r If you select [ Yes ] : • You can leav e the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages will not be sequenti al. r Default: No v [...]
-
Page 455
103 5. Specifications Combination Chart The combination chart give n below shows which modes can be used together. When you read the chart, see the f ollowing table: The following shows the combinations of functions. m These modes can be used together. $ These modes cannot be used toget her. The second mode sele cted will be the mode you are workin[...]
-
Page 456
Specifications 104 5 Supplementary Information v Mixed Size mode • Since smal l origina ls may not be correctly ali gned with the original guide, the copy image may be slanted. • Copying speed and scanning speed will be reduced. • You can place orig inals of two differen t sizes at a time. v Bypass Tray Copy • The following paper sizes can [...]
-
Page 457
Supplementary Information 105 5 v Inch version v Zoom • The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25–400%. • Y o u c a n s e l e c t a r a t i o r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e s i z e o f a n o r i g i n a l o r c o p y p a p e r . With some ratios, parts of the im age might not be copied or margins will appear on copies. v Size Magnificatio[...]
-
Page 458
Specifications 106 5 v Sort, Rotate Sort, Stack • Paper sizes and o rientations tha t can be used in the Shift Sort and Stack functions are as follows: • Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Rotate Sort function are A4 KL , B5 JIS KL and 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL . • The number of copies that can be plac ed on the tray is [...]
-
Page 459
Supplementary Information 107 5 *1 250 sheets when the optional bridge unit i s installed. *2 125 sheets when the optional bridge unit i s installed. *3 1,500 sheets when stapled. 2 Tray finisher Finisher shift tray 1 A4 KL , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , A5 K , B5 JIS KL 500 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) (20 lb.) A3 L , B4 JIS L , 11" × 17" L , [...]
-
Page 460
Specifications 108 5 Note r When using the Rotate Sort or Staple functions, the capacity may be re- duced. v Staple • The following type of paper cannot be stapled: • Translucent paper • OHP transparencies • Label paper (adhesive labels) • Thick paper •C u r l e d p a p e r • Paper of low stiffness •P a p e r o f m i x e d s i z e s[...]
-
Page 461
Supplementary Information 109 5 • Paper sizes and orientation that can be used in the Staple function and the stapler capacity are as follows: Note r When the number of copies exceeds tr ay capacity, copyin g stops. If this happens, remove the copies from t he shift tray, and then resume copy- ing. • The tray capacity for the stapled sh eets is[...]
-
Page 462
Specifications 110 5 • You cannot change stapling positions during copying. • When the original image is rotated, the staple orientation changes by 90 ° . • The maximum original image size th at can be rotated is as follows: • When using [ Top Slant ] , [ Left 2 ] or [ Top 2 ] with Combine, Double copies or Auto Reduce/Enlarge function, ?[...]
-
Page 463
Supplementary Information 111 5 • If you select Saddle Stitch functio n wi th the option al booklet finisher, the machine staples and folds the paper in the centre, then delivers the paper folded. • If you select Saddle Stitch function in Magazine mode, the machine staples the paper, and folds it like a bo ok, then delivers the paper folded. v [...]
-
Page 464
Specifications 112 5 • When an odd number of originals is placed in the ADF, the back of the last page of copied paper is blank. • During copying, the image is shifted to allow for the binding margin. • The following paper sizes can be duplexed: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L[...]
-
Page 465
Supplementary Information 113 5 v Image Repeat Depending on the paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated images may not be copied. v Centri ng Though the original is set to a differen t orientation from the paper loaded, the machine will not rotate the image by 90 ° (Rotate copy). v Erase The width of th e erased margin vari es depend[...]
-
Page 466
Specifications 114 5 v Page Numbering When page numbering is used with Combine mode, page numbers are print- ed as follows: • Page Numbering per original: Combined with 1 Sided / 2 Sided in the Combine function Combined with the Magazine or Booklet function • Page Numbering per copy: Combined with 1 Sided / 2 Sided in the Combine function If yo[...]
-
Page 467
Supplementary Information 115 5 v Front Cover, Fr ont/Back Cover • If Blank mode is selected, the cove r will not be counted as a copy. • Front and back covers are two-side d copied depending on the settings m a d e i n D i s p l a y T i m e i n C o v e r S h e e t T r a y o f U s e r T o o l s ( S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ) . • If Display T[...]
-
Page 468
116 INDEX 1 sided → 2 sided , 43 2 sided → 1 sided , 43 2 sided → 2 sided , 43 90 ° turn , 11 A Accessing user tools copy/Document Server features , 89 Adjusting copy image density , 21 Auto image density , 21 paper select , 23 reduce/enlarge , 28 tray switching , 90 Auto paper select , 24 B Background numbering , 98 Basic procedure , 15 Bat[...]
-
Page 469
117 D Date stamp , 99 change position , 64 change style , 64 font , 100 position and original orientation , 63 size , 100 Deleting program , 74 user stamp , 62 Display panel , 4 Document Server , 72 E Edit , 85 , 95 , 96 1 sided → 2 sided auto margin − T to B , 96 1 sided → 2 sided auto margin − T to T , 96 back margin − left/right , 95 b[...]
-
Page 470
118 M Main power indicator , 4 Manual imag e density , 21 Manual paper select , 24 Messages , 75 Missing image area , 9 Mixed size mode , 13 N Non-compatible origin als for Auto Document Feeder , 7 Number keys , 5 O OHP transparencies , 71 One-sided combine 1 sided 2 pages → combine 1 side , 45 1 sided 4 pages → combine 1 side , 45 1 sided 8 pa[...]
-
Page 471
119 Sort , 31 rotate sort , 31 shift sort , 32 Specifications , 10 3 Stack , 34 Stamp , 98 background numbering , 59 date stamp , 63 format , 99 language , 98 page numbering , 65 position , 98 , 99 , 100 position and original orientation , 61 , 63 , 65 preset stamp , 59 priority , 98 setting , 100 user stamp , 60 Standard orientation , 11 Stapling [...]
-
Page 472
120 AE AE B138-6608 MEMO[...]
-
Page 473
FAX Option Type 2045e Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> For safe and correct use of this machine, plea se be sure to read the Safety Information in the General Settings Guide be fore you use it. Getting Started Faxing Using Internet Fax Functions Programming Troubleshooting 1 2 3 4 5[...]
-
Page 474
FAX Option Type 2045e Operat ing Instructions Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> Printed in Japan AE AE B653-8608[...]
-
Page 475
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Notes Some illustrations in this ma[...]
-
Page 476
Copyright © 2003[...]
-
Page 477
i NOTICE NOTICE TO USERS (NEW ZEALAND) A The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indi cates only that Telecom has accepted that the it em complies with minimum conditions for connection to its n etwork. It indicat es no endorsement of th e product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no a[...]
-
Page 478
ii Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note r Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. r Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssary to view the man uals as a PDF file. r Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1“Operating [...]
-
Page 479
iii v Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility in cluded on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities”. • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed fr[...]
-
Page 480
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE ............................................ ..................................................... ................... i Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ....................................... ii How to Read This Manual ........................................................ .....[...]
-
Page 481
v Searching for a Destination ................................................................ ................ 42 Search by Destination Name ............... ................. .............. .............. ................. ...... 42 Search by Fax Number ................ ................. .............. .............. .............. ...............[...]
-
Page 482
vi[...]
-
Page 483
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the follo wing symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially h azardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine withou t following the in - structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instru ctions, al l of which are in- cluded in ?[...]
-
Page 484
2[...]
-
Page 485
3 1. Getting Started Control Panel The actual machine control panel may differ from this illustration depending on installed optional units. This ill ustration has all options installed. 1. Indicators Shows errors and machine status. : Data In indicator L : Service Call indicator x : Misfeed indicator M : Open Cover indicator d : Add Staple indicat[...]
-
Page 486
Getting Started 4 1 8. On indicator This indicator lights when the operation switch is turned on. Important r Do not turn off the main power switch while the On indicator stays lighted or is blinking. Neglecting this may damage the hard disk. Note r If the main power switch is on even when the On indicator is off, the ma- chine will receive a fax m[...]
-
Page 487
Control Panel 5 1 20. { Clear/Stop } key Clear: Cancels entered numbers or characters. Stop: Interrupts the current operation (trans- mission, scanning, copying, or prin ting). 21. { Start } key Press to start faxing, or printing reports, or lists. Reading the Display The display shows you the machine stat us, messages, and guides you through opera[...]
-
Page 488
Getting Started 6 1 5. Displays the entered number of a destination. When adding destina- tions using the number keys, press [ Add ] . 6. Press to display vario us informa- tion about transmission. 7. Switches transmis sion mode be- tween Memory Tr ansmission and Immediate Transmission. 8. Displays Quick Operation keys set for often used functions.[...]
-
Page 489
Control Panel 7 1 Reading the destination list When using the facsimile function, only fax and Internet Fax destinations pro- grammed in the Address Book appears. v Destination List 1. Title word keys appear. Allows you to switch from one page (dis- play) to a nother on the destination list. 2. Allows you to se arch for a desti- nation by fax numbe[...]
-
Page 490
Getting Started 8 1 v Immediate Transmission Note r To return to standby mode , do one of the following: • If you have placed the original in the optio nal Auto Document Feeder (ADF) and have not pr essed the { Start } key, remove the original. • If you have not placed an original, press the { Clear Mo des } key. • If you are in User Tool s m[...]
-
Page 491
Control Panel 9 1 Note r Even when the machine is being used as a copier, printer, or scanner, the sender name or number will appear for received faxes. v Immediate Transmission User code entry display When the follow ing message appear s on the display, User Code Manage ment is active. Enter a user code to de activate User Code Management. The mac[...]
-
Page 492
Getting Started 10 1[...]
-
Page 493
11 2. Faxing Transmission Modes There are two types of transmis sion: • Memory Transmission • Immediate Transmission v Memory Transmission Transmission starts automatically after the original has been stored in memory. It is a convenient method for when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away with you. You can also send the same o[...]
-
Page 494
Faxing 12 2 Note r You can use Parallel Me mory Transmission that dials while the original is being scanned. See p.77 “Parallel Memory Transmission”, Facsimile Reference <Advanced Fea- tures> . Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission Check the display to see which mode is currently active. You can change transmiss[...]
-
Page 495
Placing Originals 13 2 Placing Originals You can place the originals either in the optional ADF or on the ex posure glass. Some types of originals are un- suitable for the ADF, so they must be placed on the exposure glass. Which way you place th e original de- pends on its size and whether you are using the ADF or the exposure glass. See p.19 “Or[...]
-
Page 496
Faxing 14 2 r When sending an original of irreg- ular (i.e. custom) size or part of a large original, you can specify the scan area precisely. See p.16 “Set- ting a Scan Area”. r Custom size documents are scanned as regular size documents, so the re- ceiver may find extra blank margins or edges of images missing. If you specify a scan area, onl[...]
-
Page 497
Placing Originals 15 2 Bound original page order When setting bound originals (books, magazines, etc.), you can select to have either the left page or right page sent first. See p.61 “Book Fax”, Fac- simile Refere nce <Advanced Features > . Note r You can select whether the left pa g e o r ri g h t pa g e i s s e n t fi r s t . S e e p.15[...]
-
Page 498
Faxing 16 2 Originals unsuitable for the optional Auto Document Feeder Do not place the following types of originals in the ADF because they may be damaged. Place them on the exposure glass instead. • Originals in unacceptable sizes (See p.196 “Acceptable Types of Originals”, Facsimile Reference <Ad- vanced Features> .) • Originals co[...]
-
Page 499
Placing Originals 17 2 v Mixed Original Sizes Select this to individually scan the size of originals loaded in the ADF. For example, wh en A4 and B4 JIS size originals are sent together, usually all are sent using the size of the first original. By selecting Mixed Original Sizes, the machine scans and sends each document ac- cording to its size. No[...]
-
Page 500
Faxing 18 2 Specifying prog rammed size s A Press [ Area 1 ] or [ Area 2 ] . B Press [ OK ] . "Area 1" or "Area 2" is shown above the highlighted [ Scan Ar- ea ] . Specifying Mixed Original Sizes A Press [ Mixed Original Sizes ] . B Press [ OK ] . "Mixed Orig inal Sizes " is shown above the highlighted [ Scan Ar- ea ] [...]
-
Page 501
Placing Originals 19 2 Original sizes difficult to detect The machine finds it difficult to detect the size of the following kinds of origi- nals. If this happens, the receiving machin e may not select print paper of the cor- rect size. • Documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other t han those listed in the table below • Originals wit[...]
-
Page 502
Faxing 20 2 Memory Transmission In Memory Transmission mode, after you press the { Start } key, the machine does not dial the destination until all pages of your fax message have been scanned into memory (in contrast to Immediate Transmission, where the number is dialed first and pages are scanned and sent one by one). Memory Transmission is useful[...]
-
Page 503
Memory Transmission 21 2 r You can have the machine return to the default transmission mode (Memory Transmission or Imme- diate Transmission) after every transmission. You can change this so that the desired setting is main- tained. See p.14 2 “General Set- tings/Adjustment”, Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> . r When E-mail TX Resu[...]
-
Page 504
Faxing 22 2 D Specify a destination. Note r If you make a mistake, press the { Clear/Stop } k e y , a nd t h e n e n t e r the correct number. Reference p.36 “Entering a Fax Number” p.38 “Entering an E-mail Ad- dress” p.39 “Using Destination Lists” p.47 “Chain Dial”, Facsimile Ref- erence <Advanced Features> p.47 “Redial”,[...]
-
Page 505
Memory Transmission 23 2 F Place the next original on the expo- sure glass within 60 seconds after the machine has finished scanning the first original. G Repeat steps D to F for all origi- nals. H Place the last original, and then press [ # ] . - Checking the transmission settings You can check the transmission set- tings (e.g. destination and tra[...]
-
Page 506
Faxing 24 2 Canceling a Memory Transmission Even when fax number and e-mail address are simultaneously specified, or only e-mail addr ess is specified, you can cancel the mode using the same procedure. However, you can- not cancel the transmission of an In- ternet Fax document being sent. Before the Original Is Scanned Use this procedure to cancel [...]
-
Page 507
Canceling a Memory Transmission 25 2 B Select the file you want to cancel. Note r If the desired file is not shown, press [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next ] to find it. C Press [ Stop Transmission ] . Note r To cancel anot her file, repeat steps B and C . r To cancel stopping transmis- sion, press [ Save ] . D Press [ Exit ] . The standby display appears. B[...]
-
Page 508
Faxing 26 2 Note r To cancel anot her file, repeat steps B and C . r To cancel stopping transmis- sion, press [ Save ] . D Press [ Exit ] . The standby display appears.[...]
-
Page 509
Immediate Transmission 27 2 Immediate Transmission With Immediate Transmission, when you press the { Start } key, the fax number is dialed immediately. The message is scanned and transmitted page by page with out being stored in memory. This cont rasts with Memory Transmission which scans all pages into memory bef ore dialing t he desti- nation. Im[...]
-
Page 510
Faxing 28 2 B Place the original. Note r You can scan a fe w pages of your original from t he exposure glass and the remaining pages from the ADF. When you have finished scanning from the ex- posure glass, remove the origi- nal from the exposure glass and place the remainin g pages in the ADF within ten seconds. r T o s e n d t w o o r m o r e p a [...]
-
Page 511
Immediate Transmission 29 2 F Place the next original on the expo- sure glass within 10 seconds after the machine has finished scanning the first original. G Repeat steps D to F for all origi- nals. H Place the last original, and then press [ # ] .[...]
-
Page 512
Faxing 30 2 Canceling an Immediate Transmission Before You Have Pressed the { Start } Key A Press the { Clear Modes } key. Note r When the original is placed in the ADF, you can also cancel an Immediate Transmission by re- moving the original. After You Have Pressed the { Start } Key A Press the { Clear/Stop } key, and then remove the ori ginal. No[...]
-
Page 513
Scan Settings 31 2 Scan Settings You may want to send many different types of fax messages. Some of these may be difficult to reproduce at the receiver's end. However, your ma- chine has three setti ngs that you can adjust to help you transmit your doc- ument with the best possible image quality. v Resolution: Standard, Detail, Super Fine (op-[...]
-
Page 514
Faxing 32 2 r You can select the resolution type that is selected right after the ma- chine is turned on or modes are cleared with [ Scan End Reset ] under [ Gen. Settings/Adjust ] . See p.142 “General Settin gs/Adjustment”, Facsimile Reference <Advanced Fea- tures> . r You can have the machine return to the resolution defaul t setting af[...]
-
Page 515
Scan Settings 33 2 r You can have the machine return to the original type default setting after every transmission, with [ Scan End Reset ] under Gen. Set- tings/Adjust. See p.142 “Ge neral Settings/Adjustment”, Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> . A Press [ Original Type ] . B Select the original type you re- quire, and then press [[...]
-
Page 516
Faxing 34 2 A Select the type of image density. Auto Image Density A Make sure that [ Auto Image Den- sity ] is selected. Note r If [ Auto Image Density ] has not been selected, press [ Auto Im- age Density ] . Manual Image Density A Make sure that [ Auto Image Den- sity ] is not selected. If it has been selected, press [ Auto Image Density ] to tu[...]
-
Page 517
Scan Settings 35 2 When placing origin als on the exposure glass Note r While the machine is beeping, you have about 60 seconds (10 seconds for Immediate Transmission) to se- lect density, resolu tion, and origi- nal type. The remai ning time is shown on the display. A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings. B Remove the previou[...]
-
Page 518
Faxing 36 2 Specifying a Destination You can specify the destination using one of three me thods. v Fax number p.36 “Entering a Fax Number” v E-mail address p.38 “Entering an E-mail Address” v Destination list p.39 “Using Destination Lists” This section covers these functions and others in more detail. Note r The display show s the per [...]
-
Page 519
Specifying a Destination 37 2 Pause Press the { Pause/Redi al } key when di- aling or storing a nu m b e r t o i n s e r t a pause of about two seconds. Note r You cannot insert a pause before the first digit of a fax number. If you press the { Pause/Redial } key at the first digit, a redial occurs. See p.47 “Redial”, Facsimile Reference <Ad[...]
-
Page 520
Faxing 38 2 D Enter the number you want to tone dial using the number keys. Entering an E-mail Address When using Internet Fax transmis- sion, specify the e-mail address in place of the fax number. Note r You can enter up to 128 characters. A Make sure that is displayed in the destination display column. Note r If it is not displayed, press . B Pre[...]
-
Page 521
Specifying a Destination 39 2 Using Destination Lists When you program a destination number into a destination list, you can specify the destin ation by just se - lecting the Quick Dial key from the destination list. The programmed name appears on Quick Dial key. Pressing switches the destina- tion list between fax number destina- tion and e-mail a[...]
-
Page 522
Faxing 40 2 Switching the titl es of destination lists A Press . B Press [ Switch Title ] . C Select the type of the title, and then press [ Exit ] . D Select a destination. Note r Press to swit ch the destina- tion between fax number and e- mail address. Specifying a single destination A Press the Quick Dial key pro- grammed with the desired des- [...]
-
Page 523
Specifying a Destination 41 2 r When a destination where neither fax number nor e- mail address are pro- grammed is included in the specified group, the “ The specified group con- tains some invalid des- tination(s). Do you want to select only v alid destination(s)? ” mes- sage appears. Pr ess [ Select ] to specify destinations where the fax nu[...]
-
Page 524
Faxing 42 2 Searching for a Destination Use this procedure to search through the destination lists for a particular destination. v Search by Destination Name p.42 “Search by Destination Name” v Search by Fax Numb er p.43 “Search by Fax Number” v Search by E-mail Address p.44 “Search by E-mail Address” v Specifying a Registration Number [...]
-
Page 525
Searching for a Destination 43 2 E Se l ect a destina t ion. Note r If the desired destination does not appear, use [ U ] or [ T ] to scroll thro ugh the list. r If the search returns more than 100 destinations, only 100 will appear. Change the destination name to view fewer destina- tions. Search by Fax Number Limitation r You can search by fax nu[...]
-
Page 526
Faxing 44 2 Note r A warning appears if the search returns more than 100 items. Press [ OK ] to proce ed to step E . E Select a destination. Note r If the desired destination does not appear, use [ U ] or [ T ] to scroll thro ugh the list. Limitation r If the search returns more than 100 destinations, only 100 will appear. Change the number to view[...]
-
Page 527
Searching for a Destination 45 2 Note r If [ Search by E-mail ] appears dimmed, press [ E-mail ] on the right of the display, and then press [ Search by E-mail ] . D Enter an e-mail address to search for, and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you enter a wron g e-mail ad- dress, press [ ← ] / [ → ] and [ Backspace ] / [ Dele te All ] , and then ent[...]
-
Page 528
Faxing 46 2 C Enter a registration number using the number keys. Note r You do not need to enter the first zeros of a registration number when the display prompts you to enter five digits. If you do not enter 5 digits, press the { # } key to complete the entry. The corresponding destination ap- pears. Note r Title word ke y is switched to the one t[...]
-
Page 529
Reception 47 2 Reception There are two ways you can set up your machine to handle incoming calls: • Manual Reception (external tele- phone required) • Auto Reception You can change the reception mode only if a stan dard G3 line is us ed. You cannot change the reception mode when a line other than the standard G3 line (G3-2 or G3-3) is used. v M[...]
-
Page 530
Faxing 48 2 B Select the reception mode, and then press [ OK ] . The standby display appears. Note r To cancel the selection, press [ Cancel ] . Receiving a Fax in Manual Reception Mode A When the machine rings, pick up the handset of the external tele- phone. B If you hear beeps, press the { Start } key or the { Start Manual RX } key. (The { Start[...]
-
Page 531
49 3. Using Internet Fax Functions Internet Fax Functions The optional printer/sc anner unit is required This machine conv erts scanned docu ment images to e-ma il format and transmits the data over the Intern et. The e-mail sent by this machine can be received by another Internet Fax ma- chine. Instead of dialing the telephone number of the destin[...]
-
Page 532
Using Internet Fax Functions 50 3 Internet Fax Precautions • Internet Fax communicates with a server over a LAN. It cannot communicate directly with other parties. • If a transmission is not successful, this machine usually receives an e-mail er- ror notification. See p. 189 “Server-Generate d Error E-mail”, Facsimile Refer- ence <Advanc[...]
-
Page 533
Internet Fax Functions 51 3 Functions Not Supported by E-mail Reception The following functions are supp orted with standard fax reception, but not with Internet Faxing. • Confidential Reception • Memory Lock Reception • Polling Reception •S U B C o d e r e c e p t i o n • Authorized Reception • Reception File Print Qu antity[...]
-
Page 534
Using Internet Fax Functions 52 3 Transmitting Internet Fax Preparation You need to make System Sett ings beforehand. See “Setting Up the Machine on a Network”, Network Guide . This section describes how to scan a document into the memory and send it as e-mail. Specify the destination's e-mail address instead of fax number. You can send In[...]
-
Page 535
Transmitting Internet Fax 53 3 Limitation r When available memory is low, you may not be able to send the In- ternet Faxes. Note r Because the machine sends docu- ments as e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image , viewer ap- plications are required in order to view documents wh en they are re- ceived on a computer. r You can limit the size of[...]
-
Page 536
Using Internet Fax Functions 54 3 B Select the subject from the dis- played list. The selected subject appears in the manual input column. Note r You can enter extra charac- ters after the selected subject. If you do not need to enter extra characters, proceed to step E . C Press [ Manual Input ] . D After entering the subject, press [ OK ] . Refer[...]
-
Page 537
Transmitting Internet Fax 55 3 To enter the text A Press [ Change ] for Enter Text. B Select a text, and then press [ OK ] . To set reception notice A Select [ ON ] or [ OFF ] for Recept. Notice. Reference See p.58 “Confirming Recep- tion”. To set BCC transmission A Select [ Yes ] or [ No ] for BCC TX. C Press [ OK ] . D Press [ OK ] . E Place [...]
-
Page 538
Using Internet Fax Functions 56 3 r The original can be placed ei- ther in the ADF or on the expo- sure glass, until the { Start } key is pressed. Reference p.13 “Placing Originals” F Select the scan settings you re- quire. Note r In Internet Fax transmission, the original is scanned using "De- tail" resolution for transmission, even [...]
-
Page 539
Transmitting Internet Fax 57 3 J Press the { Start } key. This starts reading t he document into memory. The e-mail send op- eration starts after the read opera- tion is complete. When scanning is complete, the Communicating in- dicator lights and transmission starts. Note r With a l arge volume of docu- ment, it may take some time be- fore transmi[...]
-
Page 540
Using Internet Fax Functions 58 3 Confirming Reception When Reception Notice is set under “E-mail Options”, the receiver sends back a reception notice message. Once the reception notice message has been received , "OK" appears in the Result column of Journal, allow- ing the originator to verify that the transmission has been received.[...]
-
Page 541
Canceling a Transmission of an Internet Fax 59 3 Canceling a Transmission of an Internet Fax When fax and Internet Fax de stina- tions are specified simul taneously, you can cancel sending using the same method. Before the Original Is Scanned Use this procedure to cancel a trans- mission before pressing the { Start } key. A Press the { Clear Modes [...]
-
Page 542
Using Internet Fax Functions 60 3 After the Original Has Been Scanned In Note r You can not cancel the transmis- sion of an Internet Fax being sent. A Press [ Change/Stop TX File ] . The list of stored files being trans- mitted or waiting for transmission appears. B Select the file you want to cancel. Note r If the desired file is not shown, press [...]
-
Page 543
Receiving Internet Fax 61 3 Receiving Internet Fax You can receive e-mail documents by Internet Fax. There are two methods of rece iving e- mail: Auto E-mail Re ception and Manual E-mail Reception. Limitation r E-mail with attachments other than TIFF-F format files cannot be received. Senders receive an Error Mail Notification if their e-mail conta[...]
-
Page 544
Using Internet Fax Functions 62 3 B Check the message, and then press [ Exit ] . The standby display appears. Received Images Here is an example of an Internet Fax message sent from this machine and re- ceived on a computer usin g Outl ook e-mail software. The received image va ries according to e-mail software. 1. E-mail transmitted without speci-[...]
-
Page 545
Receiving Internet Fax 63 3 4. Date The date and time of e-mail transmission 5. To The e-mail address of the recipient 6. Subject Shows the subject spe cified in "E-mail Options" at the time of transmission. If no subject is specifi ed, one is automa tically assigned in the format shown in 1 above. From "Own Fax Number" (" [...]
-
Page 546
Using Internet Fax Functions 64 3[...]
-
Page 547
65 4. Programming Initial Settings and Adjustments You can send information to the other party when transmitting or recei ving a fax message. This information is shown on the display of the other ma- chine and printed as a report. The fol- lowing infor mation can be sent. Important r You can confirm programmed set- tings from the User Parameter Lis[...]
-
Page 548
Programming 66 4 v Own Fax Number (facsimile number of sender) The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when send- ing a fax using a G3 line. The re- ceived facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine and printed in a report. This func- tion is available regar dless of the manufacturer of the other party's [...]
-
Page 549
Initial Settings and Adjustments 67 4 D Program the name and facsimile number. Programming a Fax Header A Press [ First Name ] or [ Second Name ] . B Enter a fax header, a nd then press [ O K ] . Reference “Entering Text”, General Set- tings Guide Programming an Own Name A Press [ Own Name ] . B Press [ Own Name ] . C Enter an own name, and the[...]
-
Page 550
Programming 68 4 B Select line type to program. Note r The display differs depend- ing on the optional units in- stalled on your machine. C Enter your own facsimile's number using the number keys, and then press [ OK ] . Note r To enter a + sign or a s pace, press [ + ] or [ Space ] . r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear / S[...]
-
Page 551
Initial Settings and Adjustments 69 4 E Press the item you want to edit. F Press [ Backspace ] or [ Delete All ] , and then re-enter the name or number. Note r Press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key if you want to edit Own Fax Number. G Press [ OK ] . H Press [ Exit ] . I Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Deletin[...]
-
Page 552
Programming 70 4 D Press [ Fax He ader ] , [ Own Name ] , or [ Own Fax Number ] to delete. E Press the item you want to delete. F Press [ Backspace ] or [ Delete All ] , and then press [ OK ] . Note r Press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key if you want to edit Own Fax Number. G Press [ Exit ] . H Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby [...]
-
Page 553
Programming Fax Numbers and E-mail addresses 71 4 Programming Fax Numbers and E-mail addresses You can program fax destin ations u sing Address Boo k Management in the Key Operator Tools menu un der System Settings . You can also register the programmed fax numbers and e-mail addresses in a Group. Note r When you press the { Facsimile } key after c[...]
-
Page 554
Programming 72 4[...]
-
Page 555
73 5. Troubleshooting Adjusting the Volume You can change the volume of the fol- lowing sounds that the machine makes. v On Hook Mode Heard when th e { On Hook Dial } key is pressed. v At Transmission Heard when the machine sends a message. v At Reception Heard when the machine receives a message. v At Dialing Heard after pressing the { Start } key[...]
-
Page 556
Troubleshooting 74 5 When the { Facsimile } Key Is Lit in Red If this key is lit, press th e key to enter the facsimile mode. Then, refer to the table below and take the appropriate action. Problem Solutions The paper output tray is full. Remove t he paper from the tray. A facsimile error has occurred. The fa csimile has a problem. Contact your ser[...]
-
Page 557
When Toner Runs Out 75 5 When Toner Runs Out When the machine has run out of ton- er, the symbol appears on the display. Note that even if there is no toner left, you can still send fax messages. Important r The number of communications, that have been executed after the toner has r un out and that auto - matically-output Journal has not list, exce[...]
-
Page 558
Troubleshooting 76 5 Error Messages and Their Meanings If there is an error, one of the follo wing messages may appear on the display. If other message appears, follow the message. Message Causes and solutions Put original back, check it and press [Start]. Original jammed during Memory Transmis- sion. Place originals that have not been scanned agai[...]
-
Page 559
Error Messages and Their Meanings 77 5 Check whether there are any network problems. [14-01] Cannot find the DNS serv er or SMTP server. • Check the DNS server's IP address is cor- rectly programmed using the We b brows- er. See the Web browser's Help. • Check the DNS server is correctly pro- grammed using the Web browser. See the Web[...]
-
Page 560
Troubleshooting 78 5 Check whether there are any network problems. [15-02] Cannot log on to the POP3/IMAP 4 server. • Check the user name and password of the machine are correctly programmed from File Transfer under System Settings. See "Settings You Can Change with User Tools - File Transfer", Network Guide . • Consult your network a[...]
-
Page 561
Error Messages and Their Meanings 79 5 - Out of paper display message If the paper tray runs out of paper, “ No paper. Load it, then press [Ex- it]. ” appears on the display, asking you to add more paper. Note r If there is paper left in the other pape r trays, you can receive messages as usu- al, even if the message appears on the display. r Y[...]
-
Page 562
Troubleshooting 80 5 Solving Problems This table lists some common pr oblems and their solutions. Problem Causes and solutions Reference Image background appears dirty when rece ived at the other end. Images from the back page appear. Adjust scan density. p.33 “Image Density (Con- trast)” Printed or sent image contains spots. The ADF or exposur[...]
-
Page 563
Solving Problems 81 5 Transmission is possible, though receiving is impossi- ble. The optional terminal adaptor setting is incorrect. Check the setting. --- Receiving is possible, though transmission is impossible. The optional terminal adaptor setting is incorrect. Check the setting. --- When using On Hook Dial or Manual Dial, " Receiving &qu[...]
-
Page 564
Troubleshooting 82 5 When Things Don't Go as Expected I Want... Operation Reference to cancel a Memory Transmi s- sion. If the original is being scanned, press [ Stop Scanning ] or the { Clear/Stop } key. p.24 “Canceling a Memory Transmission” If the original is being sent or if it is in standby, press [ Change/Stop TX File ] or the { Clea[...]
-
Page 565
83 INDEX A Adjusting The Volume , 73 At Dialing , 73 At Printing , 73 At Reception , 73 At Transmission , 73 On Hook Mode , 73 Authorized Reception , 51 Auto E-mail Reception , 61 Auto Reception , 47 B Batch Transmission , 50 BCC Transmission , 52 Broadcasting , 20 Broadcasting Sequence , 23 C Chain Dial , 50 Check Modes key , 3 Clear Modes key , 3[...]
-
Page 566
84 N Number keys , 4 O On Hook Dial , 50 On Hook Dial key , 4 On indicator , 4 Operation switch , 4 Original Type , 31 , 32 Own Fax Number , 66 Deleting , 69 Editing , 68 Programming , 66 Own Name , 65 Deleting , 69 Editing , 68 Programming , 66 P Pause , 37 Pause/Redial key , 4 Photo , 32 Placing Originals , 13 Polling Reception , 51 Polling Trans[...]
-
Page 567
85 MEMO[...]
-
Page 568
86 AE AE B653-8608 MEMO[...]
-
Page 569
FAX Option Type 2045e Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> For safe and correct use of this machine, plea se be sure to read the Safety Information in the General Settings Guide be fore you use it. Transmission Mode Checking and Canceling Transmission Files Communication Information Other Transmission Features Recept[...]
-
Page 570
FAX Option Type 2045e Operating Instru ctions Facsimile Reference <Advanced Printed in Japan EN USA B653-8657[...]
-
Page 571
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Notes Some illustrations in this ma[...]
-
Page 572
Copyright © 2003[...]
-
Page 573
i Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note r Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. r Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssary to view the man uals as a PDF file. r Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1“Operating I[...]
-
Page 574
ii v Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility in cluded on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities”. • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed fro[...]
-
Page 575
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ........................................ i How to Read This Manual ........................................................ ............................. 1 Symbols ........... .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .....[...]
-
Page 576
iv Information Boxes .......................................................... ..................................... 42 Information Boxes ............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ................ .............. . 42 Storing Messages in Information Boxes . ......... ................................................ .[...]
-
Page 577
v Printed Report ............................................ ..................................................... ..... 82 Memory Storage Report ............... .............. ................. .............. .............. .............. ... 82 Transmission Result Report (M emory Transmission) ....................... .............. ......... 82 [...]
-
Page 578
vi 6. LAN-Fax Features Sending Fax Documents from Computers ................................................... ... 107 Before Use ............... .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ................. ....... 108 Installing the Software ............ ................. .............. .............. .............[...]
-
Page 579
vii 8. Facsimile Features Function List .............................................. .......................................... .............. 137 Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features ).................................................... 141 Quitting Default Settings .............. ... .. .............. ... .............. ... .............. .[...]
-
Page 580
viii Programming a Polling ID ................. ... ... .............. ... ... .............. .. .............. ... .......... 183 Programming a Memory Lock ID .................... ... .............. ... ... .............. ... .. ............. 183 Selecting Dial/Push Phone......................... .............. ................. .............. ...[...]
-
Page 581
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the follo wing symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially h azardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine withou t following the in - structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instru ctions, al l of which are in- cluded in ?[...]
-
Page 582
2[...]
-
Page 583
3 1. Transmission Mode Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your fax message un til a specifi ed lat- er time. This allows you to take ad- vantage of off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at the time. If you have a non-urgent fax, select Send Late[...]
-
Page 584
Transmission Mode 4 1 D Enter the time using the number keys, press [ AM ] or [ PM ] , and then press [ O K ] . The specified time is shown above the highlighted [ Send Later ] . Note r Press [ Economy Time ] to specify the economy time. r When entering numbers small- er than 10, add a zero at the be- ginning. r If you make a mista ke, press [ Clea[...]
-
Page 585
User Transmission 5 1 User Transmission This function allows you to check each user or department's transmis- sion history. To use th e function, yo u need to program a user code (eight digits max.) for each user or depart- ment, to be entered before transmis- sion. See General Settings Guide . If a user code set with an e-mail ad- dress is sp[...]
-
Page 586
Transmission Mode 6 1 r To cancel the operation, press [ Cancel ] . The display returns to that of step C . When your e-mail address is programmed with the user code If your e-mail address is pro- grammed with the user c ode, you can select whether the machine sends transmission r e s u l t b y e - mail. A Press [ Yes ] or [ No ] . Note r If you se[...]
-
Page 587
Priority Transmission 7 1 Priority Transmission Documents you send with Memory Transmission are sent in the order they are scanned. Therefore, if several messages are queued in memory, the next document will not be sent imme- d i a t e l y . H o w e v e r , b y u s i n g t hi s f u n c - tion you can ha ve your message sent before other queued mess[...]
-
Page 588
Transmission Mode 8 1 Confidential Transmission If you want to limit who views your message, use this function. The mes- s a g e w i l l b e s t o r e d i n m e m o r y a t t h e other end and not printed until an ID is entere d. There are two types of Confid ential Transmission: v Default ID It is not necessary to enter an ID when transmitting. Th[...]
-
Page 589
Confidential Transmission 9 1 D Depending on the Confidential Transmission type, use one of the following procedures: Default ID A Check that [ Default ID ] has been selected, and then press [ OK ] . "Default ID" is shown above th e highlighted [ Confidential TX ] . Note r To cancel Confidential Transmission, press [ Canc el ] . The displ[...]
-
Page 590
Transmission Mode 10 1 Polling Transmission Use Polling Tra nsmission when you want to leave an original in the ma- chine memory for others to pick u p. The message will be sent whe n the other party calls you up. There are three types of Polling Transmission. v Free Polling Transmission It is not necessary to enter the Poll- ing ID during the pro [...]
-
Page 591
Polling Transmission 11 1 r You can set whether a Polling Transmission file is deleted after transmitting in User Parameters. To save the file to transmit repeat- edly, set to “Standby (Save)”. See p.159 “User Parameters” (switch 11, bit 7). r Polling Transmission Clear Report allows you to verify Polling Trans- mission has taken place. See[...]
-
Page 592
Transmission Mode 12 1 E Press [ Only Once ] or [ Save ] to delete or save the file after transmission. Note r To delete the original immedi- ately after transmission, select [ Only Once ] . r To repeatedly send the original, select [ Save ] . r To cancel Polling Transmission, press [ Cancel ] . The display re- turns to that of step C . F Press [ O[...]
-
Page 593
Polling Reception 13 1 Polling Reception Use this function to poll a message from another terminal. You can also poll documents from many terminals with only one operation (use Groups and Keystroke Programs to fully ex- ploit this function ). There are two types of Pol l ing Recep- tion. v Default ID/Free Polling Reception Use this method for Free [...]
-
Page 594
Transmission Mode 14 1 A Press [ Transmission Mode ] . B Press [ Polling RX ] . C Depending on which method you are using, select one of the follow- ing procedures: Default ID/Free Polling Reception A Check that [ Default ID/Free Polling RX ] is selected, and then press [ OK ] . "Deflt ID/Free Poll." is shown above the highlighted [ Polli[...]
-
Page 595
Polling Reception 15 1 Polling Reserve Report This report is printed after Polling Re- ception has been set up. Note r You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters. See p.159 “User Parameters” (switch 03, bit 3). Polling Result Report This report is printed after a Polling Reception has been completed and shows its result. If E[...]
-
Page 596
Transmission Mode 16 1[...]
-
Page 597
17 2. Checking and Canceling Transmission Files After you have pressed the { Start } key (after scanning ori ginals), you can check and edit the destination or se ttings of Memory T ransmission . You can also can- cel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file, print a list of stored files, and resend a fi le which t[...]
-
Page 598
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files 18 2 Displaying Confirmation of Transmission A Press [ Change/Stop TX File ] . B Press [ Check/Change Settings ] . C Select a file to check. Note r If multiple destinations were specified, o nly the desti nation selected first appears. r If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of unsent mes[...]
-
Page 599
Canceling a Transmission 19 2 Canceling a Transmission You can cancel transmission of a file when the file is being sent, stored in memory, or fails to transmit. All the scanned data is deleted from memo- ry. You can cancel a file for Memory Transmission. This function is useful to cancel a transmiss ion when you notice a mistake in destination or [...]
-
Page 600
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files 20 2 Deleting a Destination You can delete destinations. Note r If you delete a de stination that is the only destination for a transmis- sion, the transmission is canceled. A Press [ Change/Stop TX File ] . B Press [ Check/Change Settings ] . C Select the file from which you want to delete a destination. D[...]
-
Page 601
Adding a Destination 21 2 Adding a Destination Note r A destination cannot be added us- ing a destination list. A Press [ Change/Stop TX File ] . B Press [ Check/Change Settings ] . C Select the file to which you want to add a destination. D Press [ Add ] . Note r Press to switch the destina- tion between fax number and e- mail address. E Specify t[...]
-
Page 602
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files 22 2 Changing the Transmission Time You can change the transmission time specified with Send Later. See p.3 “Sending at a Specific Time (S end Later)”. You can also delete the transmission time. If the transmission time is delet- ed, the file is transmitted immediate- ly. A Press [ Change/Stop TX File ][...]
-
Page 603
Printing a File 23 2 Printing a File If you want to che ck the contents of a file that is stored i n m e m o r y a n d n o t yet sent, use this procedure to print it out. Note r Confidential Transmission files are displayed, but cannot be printed. r You can also print files that have not been successfully transmitted. A Press [ Change/Stop TX File [...]
-
Page 604
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files 24 2 Resending a File Machine memory stores messages that could not be successfully trans- mitted using Memory Transmission. Use this procedure to resend these messages. Preparation You should select “Sto re for 24 hours” for “Store a message that could not be t ransmitted” in User Parameters. See p[...]
-
Page 605
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List) 25 2 Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List) Print this list if you want to find out which files are stor ed in memory and what their file numbers are. Knowing the file number can be useful (for ex- ample when erasing files). Note r The contents of a file stored in memory can a[...]
-
Page 606
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files 26 2[...]
-
Page 607
27 3. Communication Information Printing the Journal The Journal contains information about the last 50 communications (maximum ) made by your machin e. It is printed automa tically after every 50 communications (receptions & trans- missions). You can also print a copy of the Jour- nal at any time by following the pro- cedure below. If the mach[...]
-
Page 608
Communication Information 28 3 C Select a printing mode. All A Select [ All ] . Print per File No. A Select [ Print per File No. ] . B Enter a 4-digit file number. Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key, and then try again. Print per User Code A Select [ Print per User Code ] . B Specify a user code of up to 8 digit[...]
-
Page 609
Printing the Journal 29 3 Journal 1. Printing date Shows the date and time when the report is printed. 2. Programmed sender name Shows the sender name programmed for printing. 3. Date Shows the transmission or reception date. 4. Time Shows the transmission or reception start time. 5. Other end • For fax destinations Shows the name (for display) p[...]
-
Page 610
Communication Information 30 3 • For Internet Fax destinations Shows the e-mail address or name programmed in the destination list for transmissions. Shows the number of the destinations after an e-mail ad- dress or a name for broadcasting transmissions. Shows the e-mail address of the send- er for receptions. 6. Communication mode • For fax tr[...]
-
Page 611
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status) 31 3 Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status) You can browse a part of the Trans- mission Result Report on the display. Note r Only the transmission result of the last 200 communicati ons (recep- tions & tran smissions) are shown. r If a transmission is completed while you are using thi[...]
-
Page 612
Communication Information 32 3 Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) You can browse a pa rt of the Recep- tion Result Report on the display. Note r Only the reception result of the last 200 communications (receptions & transmissi ons) are s hown. r If a message is received while you are using this function, the result will not appear. [...]
-
Page 613
Displaying the Memory Status 33 3 Displaying the Memory Status Use this function to display a summa- ry of current memory usage. Items shown are the percentage of free memory space, the number of re- ceived confidential messages, the n u m b e r o f f i l e s t o b e s e n t , t h e n u m b e r of Memory Lock files and the number of received messag[...]
-
Page 614
Communication Information 34 3 Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print Stored RX File) The optional printer/scan ner unit is required. You can print documents that are re- ceived and stored on the hard disk. You can also delete unwanted docu- ments. Preparation Make a setting for received and stored documents before using this functi[...]
-
Page 615
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print Stored RX File) 35 3 C Select a file to be printed, and then press [ Print ] . D Select the printing mode, and then press the { Start } key. Note r To cancel printing, press [ Can- cel ] . The display retur ns to that of step C . r To delete the document after printing, press [ Delete File afte[...]
-
Page 616
Communication Information 36 3 Printing a Confidential Message This function is designed to preve nt unauthorized users from reading your messages. If someone sends you a message using Confidential Trans- mission, it is stored in memory but not automatically printed. To print the message you have to enter the Confidential ID Code. When your machine[...]
-
Page 617
Printing a Confidential Message 37 3 Note r You must enter the Confidential I D p r o g r a m m e d i n t h i s m a - chine, if the received file has no Confidential ID. r You must enter the Confidential ID programmed by the sender. Confirm the sender's Confiden- tial ID in advance. r If the Confidential IDs or Per- sonal Confidential IDs do n[...]
-
Page 618
Communication Information 38 3 Printing a File Received with Memory Lock T h is i s a s e c u r i t y f u n c t i o n d e s i g n e d t o prevent unauthorized users from reading your messages. If Memory Lock is switched on , all received mes- sages are stored in memory and are not automatically printed. To print the messages, you have to enter the [...]
-
Page 619
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock 39 3 D Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID with the numb er keys, and then press the { Start } key. Note r If the Memory Lock ID does not match, the message “ Speci- fied code does not corre- spond to programed Memory Lock ID. ” appears. Press [ Exit ] and retry after checking the Memory Lock ID. E Press [ E[...]
-
Page 620
Communication Information 40 3 Personal Boxes Preparation Before using this function, set the Personal Box in advance. See p.172 “Programming/changing Person- al Boxes”. Personal Boxes This function lets you set up th e ma- chine so that incoming messages ad- dressed to certain users are stored in memory instead of being printed out immediately[...]
-
Page 621
Personal Boxes 41 3 Printing Personal Box Messages Follow thes e steps to print a message that has been received into a Personal Box. Note r If you print a Personal Box mes- sage, it is deleted. A Make sure that the Confidential File indicator is lit. B Press [ Information ] . C Press [ Print Personal Box File ] . D Select the box with the message [...]
-
Page 622
Communication Information 42 3 Information Boxes Preparation Before using this function, set the Information Box in advance. See p.175 “Programming/changing Information Boxes”. Information Boxes Use the Information Box f unction to set up the machine as Document Server. By scanning documents into Information Boxes, other parties can receive the[...]
-
Page 623
Information Boxes 43 3 C Select the box in which you want to store the file. Note r When there are pre-pro- gr a m m e d files, a fil e mark is displayed at the end of the Box Name. r A message is displayed, when selecting a box with a file stored in it. Press [ Yes ] , when changing the file name. The file stored originally will be overwritten. Wh[...]
-
Page 624
Communication Information 44 3 Printing Information Box Messages Follow thes e steps to print a message stored in an Information Box. A Press [ Information ] . B Press [ Store/Delete/Prin t Information Box File. ] . C Press [ Print File ] . D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to print. Note r You cannot select a box that has no [...]
-
Page 625
Information Boxes 45 3 Deleting Information Box Messages Follow these steps to delete a file stored in an Information Box. A Press [ Information ] . B Press [ Store/Delete/Prin t Information Box File. ] . C Press [ Delete File ] . D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to delete. When a password is required A Enter the password, an[...]
-
Page 626
Communication Information 46 3[...]
-
Page 627
47 4. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This allows you to compose a tele- phone number from various parts, some of which may be stored in Quick Dials and some of which may be entered using the number keys. Note r Maximum length of a telephone or fax number: 128 digits r For Memory Transmission and Im- mediate Transmiss[...]
-
Page 628
Other Transmission Features 48 4 A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require. B Press the { Pause/Redial } key. C Select the destination you want to redial to. Note r Now that the date and time the original was read appears as a key, select by pressing it. r When you press [ ProgDest ] , you can register a selected recipient[...]
-
Page 629
Advanced Features 49 4 Advanced Features SUB Code Normally you can only use Confiden- tial Transmission to send messages to fax machines of the same manufactur- er that have the Confidential Recep- tion function. See p.8 “Co nfidential Transmission”. However, if the other machine supports a similar function called “SUB Code”, you can send f[...]
-
Page 630
Other Transmission Features 50 4 J Press the { Start } key. Note r If you use Immediate Transmis- sion and the fax machine at the destination does not support the SUB Code function, a mes- sage will appear on the display to i nf or m y ou o f th is . W hen th is happens, press [ OK ] to cancel the transmission. SID Code There are times when you may[...]
-
Page 631
Advanced Features 51 4 C Press [ SEP Code ] . D Press [ RX SEP Code ] . E Enter a SEP Code, and then press [ OK ] . “SEP Code” appears one line above [ Adv. Features ] on the dis- play. Note r If you make a mista ke, press [ Cancel ] or the { Clear/Stop } key before pressing [ OK ] , and then try again. F To enter a password, press [ Pass- word[...]
-
Page 632
Other Transmission Features 52 4 Transfer Request Transfer Request allows fax machines that have this func tion to autom ati- cally transfer incoming messages to multiple fax destinati ons. This func- tion helps you save costs when you send the same message to more than one place in a distant area, and saves time since many messages can be sent in [...]
-
Page 633
Advanced Features 53 4 r You can specify up to 100 Receiv- ing Stations and Transfer Stations in total. r When a Transfer Request is sent by e-mail, as soon as the Transfer Sta- tion completes transfer to all Re- ceiving Stations, it sends back a Transfer Result Report by e-mail. See p.91 “Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail)”. r[...]
-
Page 634
Other Transmission Features 54 4 F Specify a Receiving Station. Note r You cannot enter Receiving Sta- tion numbers directly. The numbers must be stored in des- tination lists, Speed Dial, or Groups in the Transfer Sta- tion(s). To specify a Recei ving Station, use the procedure de- scribed below. r To cancel the Transfer R equest, press [ Cancel ][...]
-
Page 635
Advanced Features 55 4 With transfer request s set in the system settings You can program a Quick Dial key with Transfer Stat ion and/or Receiv- ing Station using the Transfer Re- quest function in the System Set tings. See General Settings Guide . A Place the original down, and then select the desired settings. Reference p.15 “Placing Origina ls[...]
-
Page 636
Other Transmission Features 56 4 On Hook Dial The On Hook Dial function allows you to dial while hearing tone from the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connection. Limitation r This funct ion is unava ilable for the optional extra G3 interface unit. Note r This fun ction is unavaila ble in some countries. r If Transmission Result R[...]
-
Page 637
On Hook Dial 57 4 - External Telephone On Hook Dial If you have an external telephone on the fax mach ine, you can speak with the other party when you hear a voice. If you hear a voice before press- ing the { St art } key, pick up the exter- nal telephone and tel l the receiver y o u w a n t t o s e n d a f a x m e s s a g e ( a s k them to switch [...]
-
Page 638
Other Transmission Features 58 4 Manual Dial The optional handset or exte rnal telephone is requir ed. Pick up the option al handset or the handset of the external telephone and dial. When the line is co nnected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the { Start } key to send your fax mes- sage. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the other[...]
-
Page 639
Changing the Line Port 59 4 Changing the Line Port The optional extra G3 inte rface unit is require d. When the extra G3 interface unit is in- stalled, you can connect to a maxi- mum of three ports. Note r When you install the extra G3 in- terface unit, you can specify the line port home posit ion from “General Settings and Adjust- ment”. See p[...]
-
Page 640
Other Transmission Features 60 4 B Select the line you want to use. When one optional extra G3 unit is installed. When two optional extra G3 units are installed. Note r If you select “G3 Auto”, the ma- chine will use any available line. This increases efficiency. C Press [ Exit ] . The standby display appears.[...]
-
Page 641
Sub Transmission Mode 61 4 Sub Transmission Mode Book Fax Use to send book originals from the exposure glass. Pages are scanned in the order shown below. Limitation r Place the original on the exposure glass. You cannot use the optional ADF. r Depending on paper sizes avail- able in the destination machine, the message may be reduced when printed a[...]
-
Page 642
Other Transmission Features 62 4 E Select [ From first Page ] or [ From sec- ond Page ] , and then press [ OK ] . The selected original size is shown above the highlighted [ Book Fax ] . Note r Select [ From first Page ] t o s e n d a book original from the first page. r Select [ From second Page ] if you want to send a cover letter a s the first p[...]
-
Page 643
Sub Transmission Mode 63 4 p.79 “Transmission with Image Rotation” r This function is only available wi th Memory Transmission. r This function is only available wi th the ADF. r You can conf irm whether both sides were properly scanned using the Stamp function. See p.72 “Stamp”. r You can program one of the Quick Operation keys wit h opera[...]
-
Page 644
Other Transmission Features 64 4 The selected original position and page opening orientation are shown above the highlighted [ 2 Sided Original ] . Note r To cancel this mode, press [ Can- cel ] . The display retur ns to that of step C . r Select [ 2 Sided from 1st Page ] to send a two-sided origi nal from the first page. r Select [ 1 Sided for 1st[...]
-
Page 645
Sub Transmission Mode 65 4 F Specify the destination, and then press the { Start } key. Sending an Auto Document If you often send a particular page to people (for example a map, a standard attachment, or a set of instructions), store that page in memory as an Auto Document. This saves rescanning ev- ery time you want to send it. You can fax an Aut[...]
-
Page 646
Other Transmission Features 66 4 Note r Programmed Auto Documents are shown in the keys. r To cancel the Auto Document, press [ Cancel ] . The display re- turns to that of step C . E Press [ OK ] . F Specify the destination, and then press the { Start } key. Printing documents stored as Auto Documents T h i s f u n c t i o n i s u s e d f o r p r i[...]
-
Page 647
Sub Transmission Mode 67 4 Sending a Stored File Use this function to send documents stored in the Document Server. You can specify and send multiple docu- ments, and also send them with scanned originals all at once. You can also print stored originals with [ Print File ] . See p.70 “Printing stored documents”. Preparation Store the documents [...]
-
Page 648
Other Transmission Features 68 4 C Select the documents to be sent. Note r When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the or- der of selection. r Press [ TX Order ] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent. r Press [ File Name ] to place the documents in alphabetical or- der. r Press [ User Na me ] to place the documents in orde[...]
-
Page 649
Sub Transmission Mode 69 4 Specifying documents from the file name A Select [ Search by File Name ] . B Enter the name of the docu- ment to be sent, and then press [ OK ] . Note r Partial matching is used when searching for a file name. See p.163 “Special Senders to Treat Differently” C Select the file name to be sent. D If you select a documen[...]
-
Page 650
Other Transmission Features 70 4 Printing stored documents Use this function to print documents stored in the Document Server. Note r Only documents stored using the facsimile function can be printed. r You can print documents saved from the copy or the printer func- tion with the Docum ent Server. You cannot print documents saved from the scanner [...]
-
Page 651
Sub Transmission Mode 71 4 Specifying a document from the User Name A Select [ Search by User Name ] . B Press the user name of the doc- ument to be sent, and then press [ OK ] . Note r To search by user name , press [ Non-programmed Name ] , and then enter the user name. User name searches using partial matching. Reference “Entering Text”, Gen[...]
-
Page 652
Other Transmission Features 72 4 E Press [ Print File ] or [ Print 1st Page ] . When [ Print File ] is pressed, the ma- chine prints all the pages. When [ Print 1st Page ] is pressed, the ma- chine prints only the first page. Limitation r When [ Print 1st Page ] is selected, originals larger than A4 size are printed after they are reduced to A4 siz[...]
-
Page 653
Sub Transmission Mode 73 4 r A paper jam during Parallel Mem- ory Transmission may cause the transmission to be failed even if stamping is performed. r You cannot turn the Stamp func- tion on or of f while a document is being scanned. A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require. Reference p.15 “Placing Origina ls”, Fac- [...]
-
Page 654
Other Transmission Features 74 4 Label Insertion With this function you can have the receiver name printed on the message when it is received a t the other end. The name will be printed at the top of the page and will be preceded by “To”. You can also cause the text pro- grammed as a standard message to be printed. See p.14 9 “Programming, Ch[...]
-
Page 655
Sub Transmission Mode 75 4 Important r If you turn this function off, t he scale of the original is maintained and some parts of the image may be deleted when printed at the oth- er end. Default ID Transmission If you turn th is function on, transmis- sion will only take place if the desti- nation's Polling ID is the same as yours. This functi[...]
-
Page 656
Other Transmission Features 76 4 Programming the Label Insertion A Press [ Programed Name ] for La- bel Insertion. Note r Press [ OFF ] if you do not want to insert a destination. Programming the Stamp Sender Name A Press [ Change ] for Stamp Send- er Name. B Press the name of the user to be stamped, and then press [ OK ] . Note r The set user name[...]
-
Page 657
More Transmission Functions 77 4 More Transmission Functions If Memory Runs Out While Storing an Original If you run out of memory while stor - ing an original (free space reaches 0%), the messag e “ Memory is full. Cannot scan more. Trans mission will be stopped. ” is displayed. Press [ Exit ] to transmit stored pages only. Note r In default, [...]
-
Page 658
Other Transmission Features 78 4 Checking the Transmission Result •T u r n t h e T r a n s m i s sion Result Re- p o r t o n i f y o u w a n t a r e p o r t t o b e printed after every successful transmission. See p.82 “Transmis- sion Result Report (Memory Transmission)”. • If you leave the Transmission Re- sult Report off, the report will [...]
-
Page 659
More Transmission Functions 79 4 Dual Access The machine can scan other messages into memory even while sending a fax message from memory, receiving a message into memo ry, or automati - cally printing a report. Since the ma- chine starts sending the second message immediately after the cur- rent transmission en ds, the line is used efficiently. No[...]
-
Page 660
Other Transmission Features 80 4 JBIG Transmission The optional fax function upgrade unit is required. If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) compression, you can send photographic originals f aster than with other methods of compres- sion. You can only use th is function with G3 line type. Reference p.34 “Original Type”, Facsimil[...]
-
Page 661
More Transmission Functions 81 4 Journal by E-mail If the setting is made so that the Jour- nal is transmitted as e-mail, it is trans- mitted to the e-mail address of an administra tor. This section describes the CSV format of the Journal attached with e-mail. Note r To transm it the Jour nal, it is n eces- s a r y t o m a k e s e t t i n g s w i t[...]
-
Page 662
Other Transmission Features 82 4 Printed Report Memory Storage Report This report is printed after an original is stored in memory. It helps you re- view the contents and the destina- tions of stored originals. Limitation r If you use Parallel Memory Trans- mission, the Memory Storage Re- port is not printed. Note r You can turn this report on and [...]
-
Page 663
Printed Report 83 4 Communication Failure Report This report is printed when a message could not be successfully transmitted with Memory Transmission. If the machine is set up to print a Transmission Result Report, this re- port is not printed. Use it to keep a record of failed tr ansmissions so you can send them again. Note r This report is only p[...]
-
Page 664
Other Transmission Features 84 4[...]
-
Page 665
85 5. Reception Features Reception Immediate Reception Each page of a fax message is printed as soon as it is received. This method is used for standard fax messages. Normally this ma chine receives mes- sages by Immediat e Reception. But Memory Reception is used when “Combine 2 Originals”, “Multi-copy Reception”, “RX Reverse Printing” [...]
-
Page 666
Reception Features 86 5 Important r When about one hour passes after power of the machine is turned off, all fax messages stored in memory will be lost. If any messages have been lost for this reason, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this re port to identify lost messages. r The machine may[...]
-
Page 667
Reception 87 5 Note r Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory. r If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception becomes impossible and the curren t communication is terminated. r When a fax message is receive d after Store has been selected for Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features me[...]
-
Page 668
Reception Features 88 5 v When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received The machine switches to Substitute Reception o nly when the sender has pr o- grammed their Own Name or Own Fax Nu mber. If the power is switched off for more than an hour, all the messages stored in memory are deleted. In that case, the Power Failure Repo r t o r t h e J o u r n [...]
-
Page 669
Reception Functions 89 5 Reception Functions Transfer Station Transfer Stations allow you to expand the standard functions of your fax machine to set up complex networks. The diagram below may make the concept clearer. The following terminologies are used in this sect ion: v Requesting Party The machine where the message originates. v Transfer Stat[...]
-
Page 670
Reception Features 90 5 r If the Request ing Party specified a destination with both the fax num- ber and e-mail add ress pro- grammed in Transfer Station as End Receiver, this machine sends the message to the fax number or e- mail address according to the User Parameter setting. See p.159 “User Parameters” (switch 32, bit 0). - Multistep trans[...]
-
Page 671
Reception Functions 91 5 Transfer Result Repo rt (transfer request by e-mail) When this machin e receives a transfe r request by e-mail, the Transfer Result R e p o r t i s s e n t b y e - m a i l t o t h e R e - questing Party after completing all transmissions to the specified Trans- fer Station s. If the Key Operat or's e- mail address has [...]
-
Page 672
Reception Features 92 5 r If you want to forward documents to a different destinatio n depending on the sender, see p.163 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”. r You can select whether th e machine prints ou t the messages it forwards with User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6). For details, se e p.159 “User Parameters”. Routing Received Docu[...]
-
Page 673
Reception Functions 93 5 Transferring Received Documents Originals sent with a SUB Code th at matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are received then relayed to the programmed receiver. When e-mail addres ses are programmed in the Transfer Station as receiver s, re- ceived messages are sent in an e-mail format to the receivers. Preparat[...]
-
Page 674
Reception Features 94 5 r When the SMTP server attempts to rout e received documents to this machine while the machine is transmitting an e- mail, the machine wi ll respond to th e SMTP server with a "busy " signal. Then, the SMTP server u sually tries resend - ing the documents until the set ti meout. Reference p.63 “Auto E-mail Recept[...]
-
Page 675
Reception Functions 95 5 - Specifying E-mail Transfer The originator can re quest transfer of e- mail sent to another fax machine by spec- ifying the e-mail address as foll ows: v Fax Number fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine. domain name Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567, specify: fax=2121234567@abc.company.com v Qu[...]
-
Page 676
Reception Features 96 5 Printing Options Print Completion Beep W h e n t h i s f u n c t i o n i s t u r n e d o n , t h e machine beeps to let you know when a received message has been printed. Note r You can alter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely (set the volume to the minimum level). See p.75 “Adjusting the Volume”, Facsimile[...]
-
Page 677
Printing Options 97 5 Reception Time You can have the date and time print- ed at the bottom of the message when it is receive d. You can turn th is func- tion on or off using Reception Set- tings. See p.144 “Reception Settings”. Note r When a received message is print- ed on two or more sheets, th e date and time is printed on the last page. r [...]
-
Page 678
Reception Features 98 5 Note r The machine will use Memory Re- ception for Two-Sided Printing. r Printouts may vary depending on how the sender sets the originals. r You can select to have messages only from selected senders printed in this way. See p.163 “Special Senders to Treat Diff erently”. r Stored documents of the same size are printed o[...]
-
Page 679
Printing Options 99 5 Image Rotation If you have set paper in the standard tray K , incoming fax messages will be rotated automati cally to fit onto the paper. Note r You can choose to have received messages printed from a specified tray. See p.144 “Reception Set- tings”. Combine Two Originals When two messages of the same size and orientation [...]
-
Page 680
Reception Features 100 5 Page Separation and Length Reduction When the size of a received message is longer than the paper loaded in the machine, each page of the message can be split and printed on several sheets, or reduced and printed on a single sheet. For exam ple, this function sp lits the message if the message length is 20 mm (0.79") o[...]
-
Page 681
Printing Options 101 5 Page Reduction If you receive a message that is longer than the paper in the tray, th e ma- chine usually prints it on two pages. If you turn this function on, the ma- chine reduces the width and length of the received image so that it will fit on one page. If A4 L paper is loaded and a message of B4 JIS L size is received, t[...]
-
Page 682
Reception Features 102 5 When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message, the machine will choose a paper size based on the paper avail- able. For example, if your machine has 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K and A3 L loaded and you receive a A4 L size message, check the A4 L c[...]
-
Page 683
Printing Options 103 5 Setting priority trays With the same size of paper loaded into multiple trays, you can make the machine use one tray for one function and another tray for another funct ion. For example, you may load white A4 paper into tr ay 1 to use wh en making copies, and yellow A4 paper into tray 2 to use when printing received faxes. Yo[...]
-
Page 684
Reception Features 104 5 Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass Tray You can have messages sent from Specified Senders printed on paper from the bypass tray. This is useful if you need messages printed on a size of paper not stocked in the paper tray(s). You can load a maximum of 100 sheets of standard paper in the by- pass tray.[...]
-
Page 685
Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray 105 5 Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray Specifying Tray for Lines The optional extra G3 interface unit is re- quired. You can specify the document feed- ing tray for each port (telephone or LAN). For example, you can specify documents received through the G3 - 1 p o r t t o b e f e[...]
-
Page 686
Reception Features 106 5[...]
-
Page 687
107 6. LAN-Fax Features Sending Fax Documents from Computers The optional printer/scan ner unit is required. Using computers connected to the machin e through parallel ports, IEEE 1394 (IP Over 1394) ports, LANs, or wireless LANs, you can fax documents, created us- ing Windows applications, to other fax machines over a te lephone line. • To send [...]
-
Page 688
LAN-Fax Features 108 6 Before Use To use these feat ures, a LAN-Fax D r i v e r m u s t b e i n s t a l l e d o n y o u r c o m - puter. Use the LAN-Fax driver in- cluded on the printer CD-ROM. You must also make th e required comput- er to fax network settings o n the ma- chine, according to the type of connection. Reference When a personal comput[...]
-
Page 689
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 109 6 Installing individual applications Preparation Before installing the above appli- cations, install SmartNetMonitor for Client. See “Installing Smart- NetMonitor for Client/Admin”, Printer Reference 1 . Use the following procedure to install LAN-Fax Driver, Address Bo ok, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor [...]
-
Page 690
LAN-Fax Features 110 6 Applications Stored on the CD-ROM This section provides information about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Edi- tor. LAN-Fax Driver This driver allow s you to use LAN- Fax functions. v Location of the File The following folders are on the CD-ROM: • LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 95/98/Me DRIVERSLAN- FAXWIN9[...]
-
Page 691
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 111 6 Setting LAN-Fax Properties This section describes how to make settings such a s paper si ze, resolu- tion, and options. • Paper size •O r i e n t a t i o n •T r a y •R e s o l u t i o n •G r a y s c a l e • Printing images of True Type fonts When this machine is connected to a network, selectio[...]
-
Page 692
LAN-Fax Features 112 6 Basic Transmission This section describes how to send fax documents created using Windows applications. To send a fax, simply select [ Print ] from the Windows application, then select [ LAN-Fax ] as the printer, and then specify a destinat ion in the [ LAN- Fax ] dialog box. Open the applicat ion document you want to send or[...]
-
Page 693
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 113 6 B Click [ Next Number ] . The entered destination is add- ed and displayed in the [ List of Destinations: ] box. Note r If you do not want the en- tered destination to be added to the list, skip this step. Al so when this step is skipped, the document will be sent to the number entered in the [ Fax Number:[...]
-
Page 694
LAN-Fax Features 114 6 • Telephone number as sender info. • Fax number as sender info. •D a t e • Message Note r To edit the cover sheet, click [ Cover Sheet... ] . See p.118 “Editing Fax Cover Sheets”. Previewing fax images Selecting the [ Preview ] check box al- lows you to check how the fax docu- ment will be output at the destinatio[...]
-
Page 695
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 115 6 - Transmission result notification After you have sent faxes, this func- tion informs you whether the fax was successfully transmitted to its desti- nation or not. When you stor e documents in the Document Serv er or use this machine just as a printer, this function also in- forms you whether data was succ[...]
-
Page 696
LAN-Fax Features 116 6 Specifying Two-Sided Printing A Selecting the [ Duplex printing ] check box. B Click [ Print ] . Saving as Files You can save the fax do cument in TIF format. A Select the [ Save as file ] check box. B Click [ Save to... ] . C Select a folder on the folder tree. D Select a file naming method. Note r To manually enter a file n[...]
-
Page 697
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 117 6 Editing programm ed destinations A Select the destination you want to edit in the list. The company name should ap- pear in gray. B Edit the data. C Click [ Update ] . Deleting programmed destinations A Select the destination you want to edit in the list. The company name should ap- pear in gray. B Click [[...]
-
Page 698
LAN-Fax Features 118 6 Editing Fax Cover Sheets LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Edito r allows you to edit the format for fax cover sheets. It is necessary to create a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax messages using LAN-Fax Driver. Creating a cover sheet Use the following procedu re to create a fax cover sheet. You can edit the items belo[...]
-
Page 699
Sending Fax Documents from Computers 119 6 F To print the date, select the [ With a Date ] check box. G Enter the sender information. Note r You can enter company, depart- ment, and person names, and telephone and fax numbers. r To add a message, select the [ With a Message ] check box, and then enter a message. H Click [ OK ] . I Specify a destina[...]
-
Page 700
LAN-Fax Features 120 6 LAN-Fax Error Report This report is printed when options are not prope rly selected, or a communica- tion error with a computer occurs. Ch eck the error message of the report. If you entered a user code in the [ Options ] dialog box, this report can be sent to you by e-mail, provided your e-mail address is programmed in the m[...]
-
Page 701
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser 121 6 Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser The optional printer/scan ner unit is required. You can view received fax messages and their lists or print these messages using a Web browser on a network computer. Note r You need to select "Sto re" as the "Reception File Sett ing" in[...]
-
Page 702
LAN-Fax Features 122 6 D Click the Property icon of the de- sired fax message. Information such as reception dates, senders, line types, number of pages, and file numbers appear in addition to preview images. Note r You can select the thumbnail display, details display, or icon display. Click [ Thumbnails ] , [ De- tails ] , or [ Icons ] . E View t[...]
-
Page 703
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser 123 6 Deleting fax information using a Web browser A Start a Web browser. B Enter the machine's IP address in the [ Address ] field. C Click [ Fax Received File ] . The list of received fax messages appears. D Click and check the check box be- side the fax message to be delet- ed. Note r You can sele[...]
-
Page 704
LAN-Fax Features 124 6 Viewing Received Messages on a Computer ScanRouter V2 Professional (sol d separately) is also required as a delivery serve r. Desk- topBinder V2 Professional Lite or Deskto pBinder V2 Professional software (both sold separately) must be installed on your computer. Delivering Received Messages Messages received by the machine [...]
-
Page 705
125 7. Simplifying the Operation Programs If you regularl y send messages to a particular de stination o r transmit us- ing the same functi ons, you can save repetitive keypad operations by reg- istering this information in a Key- stroke Program. Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs Keystroke Programs can be recalled by just pressing a Qui c[...]
-
Page 706
Simplifying the Operation 126 7 Example of regist ering a program using Send Later with the fax number “0123456789” A Press { 0 } , { 1 } , { 2 } , { 3 } , { 4 } , { 5 } , { 6 } , { 7 } , { 8 } , { 9 } using the number keys. B Perform the Send Later setting till the procedure of pressing [ OK ] key to return to the stand- by mode. Reference p.3[...]
-
Page 707
Programs 127 7 Changing a program name A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown. Note r If the standby display is not shown, press the { Facsimile } key. B Press the { Program } key. C Press [ Change Name ] . D Select the program number of the name you want to change. E Enter a new program name, and then pr[...]
-
Page 708
Simplifying the Operation 128 7 Using a Program Note r Using the program causes the pre- vious settings to be cleared. Example of exec uting a program using Send Later with the fax number “0123456789” A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown. Note r If the standby display is not shown, press the { Facsi[...]
-
Page 709
Using the Document Server 129 7 Using the Document Server Use this function to store documents in the Document Server on this ma- chine. The Document Server can store docu- ments from various applications. The documents that are stored using the facsimile function are available to transmit by facsimile. Storing in the Document Server en- ables the [...]
-
Page 710
Simplifying the Operation 130 7 Storing a Document You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a document. v File names Scanned documents are automati- cally assigned names like “FAX0001” or “FAX0002”. See p.131 “Setting a file name”. v User Names You can set this function if neces- sary to know who and w[...]
-
Page 711
Using the Document Server 131 7 Programming a user name Note r Set a user name fr om those pro- grammed in the user code. User code is programmed in System Settings. See General Settings Guide . A Press [ User Name ] . B Press the user name to be pro- grammed, and then press [ OK ] . Note r Press the title key to sw itch between titles. r To set an[...]
-
Page 712
Simplifying the Operation 132 7 Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key before pressing [ OK ] , and then reenter your password. r You can enter up to four dig- its. C Enter the password again, and then press [ # ] . D Press [ OK ] . Note r Press [ Change ] to enter a dif- ferent password. E Press [ OK ] . F Press [ [...]
-
Page 713
Using the Document Server 133 7 D If you select a document for which a password is set, enter the pass- word, and then press [ OK ] . When a selected file does not have a password, proceed to step E . E Change the desired information of the stored document. Changing a user name A Press [ Change User Name ] . B Press [ Clear ] . The user name is del[...]
-
Page 714
Simplifying the Operation 134 7 C Enter a new password using the number keys, and then press [ # ] . D Press lower [ Change ] . E Enter the password again, and then press [ # ] . F Press [ OK ] . F Press [ Exit ] . G Press [ OK ] . The standby display appears. Deleting a Stored Document Use this function to delet e stored doc- uments. Note r You ca[...]
-
Page 715
Using the Document Server 135 7 G Press [ Exit ] . H Press [ OK ] . The standby display appears. Managing Documents Saved in the Document Server from a Computer Using DesktopBinder Fax documents saved in the Docu- ment Server can be viewed and con- trolled from a network computer with DesktopBinder V2 Lite or Desk- topBinder V2 Profes sional instal[...]
-
Page 716
Simplifying the Operation 136 7[...]
-
Page 717
137 8. Facsimile Features Function List The User Tools allow you to program your identification, store frequently used numbers and settings, and customize de fault settings to meet your needs. The User Tools are grouped by functions so that y ou can quickly and easily find the desired User Tool. v General Settings /Adjustment Description Reference [...]
-
Page 718
Facsimile Features 138 8 v Reception Settings v E-mail Settings Description Reference Allows you to switch the following reception functions on or off: • Switc h Reception Mode • Authorized Reception See p.167 “Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)”. •F o r w a r d i n g See p.167 “Forwarding”. • Reception File Print Quantity See p.1[...]
-
Page 719
Function List 139 8 v Key Operator Tools - Displays • Each menu appears in each tab. • You can switch the display by pressi ng [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next ] . • The selected item is highlighted. • When you have made all required settings, press [ OK ] . If [ OK ] is not pressed, the new settings might be cance led. • Press [ Cancel ] to can c[...]
-
Page 720
Facsimile Features 140 8 - Key Operator Code When Key Ope rator Code is progr ammed and tu rned on, user s have to ente r a programmed Key Operator Co de (eight digits maximu m) to operate the User Tools. This prevents unauthorized people from changing settings. Note r Yo u c a n t ur n th e K e y O pe ra t or Co de o n o r o f f i n “ Us e r T o[...]
-
Page 721
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Features) 141 8 Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features) Customize the fa csimile settings ac- cording to the operatio ns to be fre- quently performed. Note r The machine allows you to change the facsimile defaults in a mode that is not the facsimile mode. Af- ter changing the defaults, select facsimile mode again.[...]
-
Page 722
Facsimile Features 142 8 General Settings/Adjustment v Memory/Immed. Tr ansmission Switch Use this function to specify the Transmission Mode for document transmission. • Memory Transmission • Immediate Transmission v Text Size Priority Use this function to specify the character size of your originals for scanning. •S t a n d a r d •D e t a [...]
-
Page 723
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Features) 143 8 v Line Priority Setting Use this function to specify the line of usage. Note r The display may differ depend- ing on the line type you have. v Program Economy Time Use this function for specifying a time for transmission when c all charges are low. See p.3 “Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)?[...]
-
Page 724
Facsimile Features 144 8 Reception Settings v Switch Reception Mode Specify the method for receiv ing fax messages. • Manual Reception • Auto Reception v Authorized RX (Authorized Recep- tion) Specify whether or not unwanted fax messages are to be screened out. •O N •O F F v Forwarding Specify whether or not received fax messages are to be [...]
-
Page 725
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Features) 145 8 C Select a tray to deliver the re- ceived paper onto, and then press [ O K ] . Note r If you wa nt to specify an oth- er line type, repeat from step B . v Checkered Mark Specify whet her or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of received fax messages. •O N •O F F v Center Mark[...]
-
Page 726
Facsimile Features 146 8 B Enter the maximum e-mail size using the number keys. Note r Maximum e-mail size can be between 64 and 102400 KB. C Press [ OK ] v SMTP RX File Delivery Settings (SMTP Reception File Delivery Set- tings) This function is available on sys- tems that allow routing of e-mail received via SMTP. See p.94 “Rout- ing E-mail Rec[...]
-
Page 727
147 9. Key Operator Setting Key Operator Tools List You can program, change, or delete st andard messages and auto documents. You can also set the line type for the machine connection, program var ious IDs (including a Polling ID), fax destinations, and many othe r items. In addition, you can check the number of docume nts transmi tted and received[...]
-
Page 728
Key Operator Setting 148 9 Box Setting By using SUB and SEP Codes with these functions, you can send messages to another par- ty's box, and retrieve messag- es stored i n boxes. p.172 “Box Settings” Transfer Report Before using Tra nsfer Re- quest, you need this Transfer Report setting. p.181 “Transfer Report” Program Confidential ID R[...]
-
Page 729
Using Key Operator Settings 149 9 Using Key Operator Settings Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages Use this function to program stan- dard messages to be prin ted at the top of the first page of the original. It is useful for personalizing messages such as sending greetings. Note r You can prog ram three stan dard messages. You can[...]
-
Page 730
Key Operator Setting 150 9 B Press [ Delete ] . Note r To delete another message, repeat from step A . r To cancel a deletion, press [ Do not Delete ] . The display re- turns to that of st ep A . E Press [ Exit ] . F Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Storing, Changing, and Deleting an Auto Document I f y o u o f t e[...]
-
Page 731
Using Key Operator Settings 151 9 Storing a file A Select [ *Not Programed ] . B Enter a file name, and then press [ OK ] . Reference “Entering Text”, General Set- tings Guide Changing a file A Select the file you want to change. The “ A file is alrea dy stored. If another file is stored, previous one will be deleted. Is it OK? ” mes- sage [...]
-
Page 732
Key Operator Setting 152 9 B Press [ Facsimile Features ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] . D Press [ Store/Change/Delete Auto Doc- ument ] . E Press [ Delete ] , and then select the file you want to delete. F Press [ Delete ] . Note r To cancel deleting, press [ Do not Delete ] . The display returns to that of step E . G Press [ Exit ] . H Press [...]
-
Page 733
Using Key Operator Settings 153 9 E Select [ Program Size 1 ] or [ Program Size 2 ] . F Enter a horizontal size using the number keys. Note r Each time you press [ mm ] or [ inch ] , the units switch between “mm” and “inch”. If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [ mm ] or [ inch ] , the length is converted automati- cally a[...]
-
Page 734
Key Operator Setting 154 9 E Press [ Delete ] , and then select [ Pro- gram Size 1 ] or [ Program Size 2 ] . F Press [ Yes ] . Note r To cancel deleting, press [ No ] . The display returns to that of step E . G Press [ Exit ] . H Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Printing the Journal The Journal allows you t o check[...]
-
Page 735
Using Key Operator Settings 155 9 Forwarding This functi on allows y ou to have mes- sages printed on the ma chine, and sent to a specified End Receiver. This is useful if, for example, you are visiting another office and would like a copy of your messages to be sent to that office. Preparation To use this function, set Forward- ing under Reception[...]
-
Page 736
Key Operator Setting 156 9 E Press [ ON ] . Note r If there is an End Receiver al- ready programmed, a receiver name is shown. If you want to change the receiver, press [ Re- ceiver ] and proceed to step F . r To cancel Forwarding, press [ Cancel ] and proceed to step H . F Specify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [ OK ] .[...]
-
Page 737
Using Key Operator Settings 157 9 Forwarding Mark You can print a Forwarding Mark on the receiver's messages that have been forwarded. The receiver can distinguish between forwarded messages and usual recep- tions. Note r You can specify whether or not to print a Forwarding Mark in the User Parameters. See p.159 “ User Parameters” (switch [...]
-
Page 738
Key Operator Setting 158 9 ECM I f p a r t o f a t r a n s m i s s i o n f a i l s b e c a u s e of a line problem, the lost data is auto- matically resent. For this function to work, the other machine must have ECM. You can tu rn this function on or off through the following procedure. Note r If you turn ECM off, you cannot use the following funct[...]
-
Page 739
Using Key Operator Settings 159 9 User Parameters User Parameters allow you to customiz e various settings to suit your needs. To change function settings, set the User Param eter Switches. Preparation A c c e s s t o s o m e U s e r P a r a m e t e r S e t t i n g s r e q u i r e s i n s t a l l a t i o n o f o p t i o n a l equipment, or that oth[...]
-
Page 740
Key Operator Setting 160 9 05 0 Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substitute Recep- tion during service call) Possible (Substitute RX) Not possible (Reception off) 2, 1 Substitute the reception when the machine cannot print (because all pa- per trays have run out of paper, toner is empty, or all paper trays are out of order) 00: Enabled uncondit[...]
-
Page 741
Using Key Operator Settings 161 9 18 0 Print date with Fax Header O ff On 1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Header Off On 2 Print file number with Fax Header Off On 3 Print page number with Fax Header Off On 19 0 Use paper delivery shift func- tion (Offset Print) Off On 1 Sort Journal by line type Off On 20 0 Automatic pr inting of the LAN-Fax Er[...]
-
Page 742
Key Operator Setting 162 9 Changing the User Parameters Important r We recommend you print and keep a User Parameter list when you program or change a User Pa- rameter. See p.162 “Printing the User Parameter List”. r Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the pre- vious pages. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ [...]
-
Page 743
Using Key Operator Settings 163 9 E Press the { Start } key. Note r To cancel printing a list after pressing the { Start } key, press [ Stop Printing ] . The display re- turns to that of step D . F Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Special Senders to Treat Differently By programming part icular receivers in advance,[...]
-
Page 744
Key Operator Setting 164 9 r You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax re- ceptions. • Authorized Reception • Reception File Print Quantity •M e m o r y L o c k • Reception Reverse Printing r To use the Forwarding, Print 2 Sided, or Paper Tray with Inter- net Fax receptions, program the e-mail address of the sender. Limitatio[...]
-
Page 745
Using Key Operator Settings 165 9 Forwarding Use this function to print received messages, and then transfer them to those receivers programmed b efore- hand. It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special Senders. Note r To use this functi on, program your Special Senders, and then select “ON” fo r “Forward i[...]
-
Page 746
Key Operator Setting 166 9 Paper Tray Use this function to print documents received fr om programmed senders (Special Senders) and the documents from other senders on different types of paper. For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1 and white paper is in Tray 2, the ma- chine prints the documents from Spe- cial Senders on the blu e paper and prints[...]
-
Page 747
Using Key Operator Settings 167 9 H Select the item you want to pro- gram. Note r You must select only the item you want to program. r To cancel these settings, press [ Cancel ] . The display returns to that of step E . Authorized RX (Authorized Reception) A Select [ Authorized RX ] . B Press [ ON ] or [ OFF ] , and then press [ OK ] . Note r After[...]
-
Page 748
Key Operator Setting 168 9 Note r Selectin g [ Same as basi c set- tings ] will result in the same setting made for “RX File Print Qty” of “Reception Set- tings”. See p.144 “Reception Settings”. C Enter the print quantity using the number keys, and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } k[...]
-
Page 749
Using Key Operator Settings 169 9 I Press [ OK ] . A Special Sender has been pro- grammed. Note r To program another sender, re- peat the procedure from step E . J Press [ Exit ] . K Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Programming Initial Se t Up of a Special Sender Use this function to program “Initial Set Up” of[...]
-
Page 750
Key Operator Setting 170 9 Programming Bypass Tray Paper Size A Press [ Bypass Tray Paper Size ] . You can select a size from [ Auto Detect ] , [ Standard Size ] , or [ Cus- tom Size ] . If you select [ Auto Detect ] , pro- ceed to steps B and G . If you select [ Standard Size ] , pro- ceed to steps B , C , and G . If you select [ Custom Size ] , p[...]
-
Page 751
Using Key Operator Settings 171 9 Note r You can specify a horizon tal size from 148 mm (5.9 inch) to 600 mm (23.7 inch). You cannot enter a size smaller than 148 mm or larger tha n 600 mm. r Each time you press [ mm ] or [ inch ] , the units switch be- tween “mm ” and “inc h”. If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [ mm ] o[...]
-
Page 752
Key Operator Setting 172 9 Box Settings The follow ing function s are for deliv- ery and tr ansfer of messa ges: •P e r s o n a l B o x • Information Box •T r a n s f e r B o x Reference For details about how to set up these functions: • p.172 “Progra mming/chang- ing Personal Boxes” • p.175 “Progra mming/chang- ing Information Boxe[...]
-
Page 753
Using Key Operator Settings 173 9 r If the fax number or e-mail address of a programmed receiver is delet- ed using System Settings, the set- ting for the receiver is cancelled and a message is not delivered. If the fax number or e-mail address of a programmed receiver is changed, a message is delivered to the new fax number. Reference p.40 “Pers[...]
-
Page 754
Key Operator Setting 174 9 C Re-enter the password, and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key before pressing [ OK ] , and then try again. r If you want to change the password after pressing [ OK ] , press [ Change ] , and then per- form from step B . D Press [ OK ] . Programming an End Receiver[...]
-
Page 755
Using Key Operator Settings 175 9 With a programmed password A Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key. F Press [ Delete ] . Note r T o c a n c e l d e l e t i n g a b o x , p r e s s [ Do not Delete ] . The display re- turns to that of step E . G Press [...]
-
Page 756
Key Operator Setting 176 9 Note r To change a box already pro- grammed, press it, and then proceed to step H . If a password has been programmed, enter the password, press [ OK ] , and then proceed to step H . F Press [ Information Box ] . G Enter a box name, and then press [ OK ] . Reference “Entering Text”, General Set- tings Guide H Enter th[...]
-
Page 757
Using Key Operator Settings 177 9 Deleting Information Boxes This section describes how to delete Information Boxes. Limitation r If messages have been pro- grammed in the box, you cannot delete the box. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ Facsimile Features ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] . D Press [ Box Setting ] . E Press [ Dele[...]
-
Page 758
Key Operator Setting 178 9 Programming/changing Transfer Boxes This functi on turns your machine int o a fax relay station. Documents sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are received, and then relayed to a programmed receive r. Since documents can be sent to multi- ple destinations in a si ngle transfer re - [...]
-
Page 759
Using Key Operator Settings 179 9 r Deleting a destination specified as an end receiver from the Address Book causes the settings for the end receiver to be deleted. If this is the case, reprogram the end receiv- er. If the destination has been changed, a messag e is transmitted to the new destinat ion. A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Pre[...]
-
Page 760
Key Operator Setting 180 9 Programming a password If you do not want to program a password, proceed to step J . A Press [ Password ] . B Enter a password, and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key before pressing [ OK ] , and then try again. C Re-enter the password, and then press [ OK ] . Note [...]
-
Page 761
Using Key Operator Settings 181 9 Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key. F Press [ Delete ] . Note r To cancel delet ing a special sender, press [ Do not Delete ] . The display returns to that of step E . G Press [ Exit ] . H Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Printing the Box List F[...]
-
Page 762
Key Operator Setting 182 9 B Press [ Facsimile Features ] . C Press [ Key Operator Tools ] . D Press [ Transfer Report ] . E Specify the fax number. Programming a G3 Fax Number A Press [ G3 Fax No.(Dir.) ] . B Enter your facsimile number using the number keys , and then press [ OK ] . Note r If you make a mistake, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Sto[...]
-
Page 763
Using Key Operator Settings 183 9 Programming a Polling ID Program a Polling ID to use the Transfer Request, T ransfer Station, Default ID Polling Tr ansmission, and Default ID Poll ing Reception f unc- tions. When you use ID Transmission, program the same ID as the one pro- grammed on the sender's machi ne. Reference p.10 “Polling Transmiss[...]
-
Page 764
Key Operator Setting 184 9 Note r If you make a mista ke, press [ Clear ] or the { Clear/Stop } key be- fore pressing [ OK ] , and then try again. To cancel programming an ID, press [ Cancel ] . The display returns to that of step D . F Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. The standby display appears. Selecting Dial/Push Phone Use this function to[...]
-
Page 765
Using Key Operator Settings 185 9 Note r If the facsimile is set to store re- ceived documents, document re- ception can be notified to a specified e-mail address. r Documents saved on the hard disk are categorized as re ceived and stored document s. For details about printing saved documents, see p.34 “Printing/Deleting Re- ceived and Stored Doc[...]
-
Page 766
Key Operator Setting 186 9 Setting a User Code for Viewing Received and Stored Documents You can view and print documents received and saved on the hard disk using a Web browser or DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite. Specify whether or not a user code is entered to view saved documents. If you want to use a user code, set one using a ma ximum of eight digits [...]
-
Page 767
187 10. Solving Operation Problems Reading Reports Error Report An Error Report is printed if a mes- sage cannot be successf ully sent or re- ceived. Possible causes include a problem with your machine or n oise on the telephone line. If an error occurs dur- ing trans mission, r esend the ori ginal. If an error occurs during reception, ask the send[...]
-
Page 768
Solving Operation Problems 188 10 Important r Do not turn off the main power switch while the power indicator is lit or blinking. If you do, the hard disk and memory may be dam- aged and failure could result. r Turn off the main powe r switch be- fore pulling out the plug. If you pull out the plug wi th the switch on, the hard disk and memory may b[...]
-
Page 769
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax 189 10 When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax Error Mail Notification The machine sends the Error Mail Notificati on to the sender when it is unable to successfully receive a particular e-mail mess age. A "cc" of this notification is also sent to the administrator's e-ma il address when one is[...]
-
Page 770
Solving Operation Problems 190 10[...]
-
Page 771
191 11. Appendix Replacing the Stamp Cartridge The optional ADF is required. When the stamp becomes lighter, re- place the cartridge. Note r Use the cartridge specified for this machine. r Do not add ink to the cartridge by yourself. Neglecting this can cause ink leakage. r Be sure not to dirty your fingers with ink from the cart ridge. A Lift the [...]
-
Page 772
Appendix 192 11 Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone Connecting the Telephone Line To connect the machin e to a telephone lin e, use a snap-in modular t ype connec- tor. R CAUTION: R ATTENTION: Important r By law in the United States, you must program your phone number identifi- cation (your fax number) into your ma chine before[...]
-
Page 773
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone 193 11 Selecting the Line Type Select the line type to w hich the machin e is connected. There are two types: tone and pulse dial. Note r This function is not available in some areas. Select the line type using “Key Operator Settings”. See p.184 “Selecting Di- al/Push Phone”. Connecti[...]
-
Page 774
Appendix 194 11 v Adjusting the handset bell volume Adjust the handset ri nger volume using the volu me switch. Ringer 1 3 2 6 9 5 8 0 4 7 ND1X00E1[...]
-
Page 775
Optional Equipment 195 11 Optional Equipment Fax Function Upgrade Unit JBIG compressio n for transm issi on/reception becomes possible. You can increase the maximum programma ble numbers of the following func- tions. See p.201 “Maximum Values”. •Q u i c k D i a l • Memory Transmission file •A u t o D o c u m e n t • Specific Sender •P[...]
-
Page 776
Appendix 196 11 Specifications v Fax Transmission and Reception v Power Consumption v Internet Fax Transmission and Reception Standard G3 Resolution G3: 8 × 3.85/mm•200 × 100 dpi (Standard), 8 × 7.7/mm•200 × 200 dpi (Detail), 8 × 15.4/mm•200 × 400 dpi (Fine), 16 × 15.4/mm•400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine: optional expansion memory required[...]
-
Page 777
Specifications 197 11 Compatible Machines This machine is compatible to machines having the following specifications. Communication Protocols • Tra nsmission SMTP, TCP/IP • Receptio n POP3, SMTP, IMAP 4, TCP/IP E-mail format Single/Multi -part, MIME Conversion Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH compression) Authentication method SMTP-AUT H, POP be[...]
-
Page 778
Appendix 198 11 Acceptable Types of Originals Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine. Wet ink or correcting fluid from o riginal s will mark the exposure glass and affect the resulting image. Acceptable original sizes Paper size and scanned area v Exposure Glass v ADF Where original is set Accept able origina[...]
-
Page 779
Specifications 199 11 Limitation r There may be a difference in the size of the image whe n it is printed at the des- tination. r If you place an original larger than A3, 11" × 17" on the exposure glass, only an A3, 11" × 17" area is scanned. Note r Ev e n i f a n o r i gi n a l is c o r re c t l y pl a c e d o n t h e e x p o[...]
-
Page 780
Appendix 200 11 - Maximum scan area The maximum scan area is shown below: • Memory Transmission: 297 × 1,200 mm/11" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF • Immediate Transmission: 297 × 1,200mm/1 1" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF Note r During Immediate Transmission, the le ngth of the scanning range can be- come narrower than 1,200 [...]
-
Page 781
Maximum Values 201 11 Maximum Values The following list contains th e maximum value for each item. Note r The maximum number of pa ges that can be stored or transmitted may de- crease depending on the contents of documents. Item Standard With optional unit Fax function upgrade unit Expansion memory Expansio n mem- ory + fax func- tion upgrade unit [...]
-
Page 782
Appendix 202 11 *1 With the optional printer/scanner unit or network board, a maximum of 2000 desti- nations can be programmed. *2 This indicates the number of transmission records that you can check using Smart- NetMonitor for Admin. From the machine you can check up to 400 communication records (transmission plus reception). The number of Stan- d[...]
-
Page 783
203 INDEX 180-Degree Rotation Printing , 98 2-Sided Printing , 85 A Address Book , 116 Authorized Reception , 164 Auto Document , 65 , 150 Changing , 150 Deleting , 15 1 Sending , 65 Storing , 150 Auto Fax Recept ion Power-up , 95 Automat ic Redial , 78 Auto Reduce , 74 B Basic Transmission , 112 Batch Transmission , 78 Book Fax , 61 Box Setting , [...]
-
Page 784
204 I ID Override Polling Reception , 13 ID Override Transmission , 10 Image Rotation , 79 , 99 Immediate Reception , 85 Information Boxes , 42 Changing , 175 Deleting , 17 7 Printing , 181 Programming , 175 Storing Messages , 42 J JBIG , 80 , 95 Reception , 95 Transmission , 80 Journal , 27 Journal by E-mail , 81 Journal by E-mail, Transmitting , [...]
-
Page 785
205 R RDS (Remote Diag nostic System) , 188 Receiving Station , 52 , 89 Reception , 85 Reception Features , 85 Reception File Print Quantity , 165 Reception Functions , 89 Reception Reverse Printing , 165 Reception Settings , 144 Reception Time , 97 Reception Result (RX File Sta tus) , 32 Redial , 47 Reduced Image Transmission , 74 Report , 82 , 18[...]
-
Page 786
206 MEMO[...]
-
Page 787
207 MEMO[...]
-
Page 788
208 EN USA B653-8657 MEMO[...]
-
Page 789
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operating Instructions Printer Reference 1 For safe and correct use of this machine, plea se be sure to read the Safety Information in the "General Settings Gu ide" before you use it. Getting Started Preparing to Print[...]
-
Page 790
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operat ing Instructions Printer Reference 1 Printed in Japan EN USA B654-8617[...]
-
Page 791
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Important Contents of this manual a[...]
-
Page 792
Note to users in the United States of Americ a Notice: This equipment has been tested and fo und to comply wi th th e limits for a Class B digital device , pursu- ant to Part 15 of the FCC R ules. These limits ar e designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference in a resid ential installation. Th is equipment gene rates, use[...]
-
Page 793
i TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ....................................... 1 How to Read This Manual ........................................................ ............................. 3 1. Getting Started Control Panel.......................................................................[...]
-
Page 794
ii[...]
-
Page 795
1 Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssary to view the man uals as a PDF file. Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1“Opera[...]
-
Page 796
2 Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility in cluded on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities”. • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed fr[...]
-
Page 797
3 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the follo wing symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result[...]
-
Page 798
4[...]
-
Page 799
5 1. Getting Started Control Panel 1. Indicators Displays errors and machine status. m : Data In indicator The Data In indicator shows the status of data reception from a computer. • Blinks when data is being received. • Lights when there is data remaining to be printed. See "Multi-Access", General Settings Guide . L : Service call in[...]
-
Page 800
Getting Started 6 1 7. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the power on ( t h e P o w e r i n d i c a t o r g o e s o n ) . T o t u r n t h e power off, press this switch again (the Power indicator goes off). 8. { Clear/Stop } key Press to cancel the entered data. 9. { # } key Press after entering a value. 10. Number keys Press to enter a va[...]
-
Page 801
Control Panel 7 1 3. [ Form Feed ] key Press to print all the data left in the ma- chine's input buffer. Note When the machine is online, the status appears dimly. This function is not available with the RPCS TM printer language. 4. [ Job Reset ] key Press to cancel the current print job. If you press it when the machine is offline and[...]
-
Page 802
Getting Started 8 1[...]
-
Page 803
9 2. Preparing to Print This section g ives instructio ns for conn ecting the machine and computer, config- uring the machine, an d installing software. When operating the machine wi th a parallel connection, USB connection, or SCSI print (IEEE 1 394) connection • Connect the machine and computer usin g a parallel cable, a USB cable, or an IE[...]
-
Page 804
Preparing to Print 10 2 Preparing the Machine Connecting the Machine Reference For information about connection using Ethernet and wireless LAN, see "Confirming the Connection", Network Guide . For information about connection using Bluetooth TM , see the manual that comes with th e optional Blue- tooth interface unit. Requirements Before[...]
-
Page 805
Preparing the Machine 11 2 SCSI Print (IEEE 1394) Connection C Plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the compu- ter’s interface. D Turn on the machine's main pow- er switch. E Turn on the computer. Note When using Windows 95/98 SE/Me or Windows 2000/XP, a printer driver instal lation screen might appear when the compu[...]
-
Page 806
Preparing to Print 12 2 Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray This section g ives instructions for set- ting paper on the bypas s tray. Use the bypass tray to print onto OHP t rans- parencies, labels, thick paper, and en- velopes that cannot be loaded in the paper tray. Reference For details about setting paper in the regular paper tray, see General Set[...]
-
Page 807
Preparing the Machine 13 2 C Gently insert paper face down into the bypass tray until the beeper sounds. 1. Extender 2. Paper guides Note The beeper will not sound if it is turned off. Gently insert paper until it stops. Do not stack paper over the lim- it mark, otherwise a skewed im- age or misfeeds might occur. Open out th e extender [...]
-
Page 808
Preparing to Print 14 2 Setting custom size paper Note Custom sizes can also be set using the printer driver . The following procedures are not necessary when setting custom sizes using the printer driver. Custom size settin gs set using the printer driver have priority over those set using the machine's dis- play panel. When the p[...]
-
Page 809
Installing the Software 15 2 Installing the Software This manual assumes you are familiar with general Windows procedures and practices. If you are not, see the operating instructions that come with Windows for details. The procedure for installing the print- er driver depends on the connection with the computer. With a parallel or Ethernet connect[...]
-
Page 810
Preparing to Print 16 2 The following table shows the printer drivers and software that can be in- stalled using Auto Run: *1 Available operating systems are: Win- dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0. Auto Run is una- vailable with Macintosh. Quick Install Auto Run will st art the installer auto- matically when you insert the CD- ROM int[...]
-
Page 811
Installing the Software 17 2 Important If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you upgrade the Windows NT 4.0 operat ing system to Service Pack 4 or later before installing the PCL 6/5e or RPCS™ printer drivers. Contact your Windows retailer for more in- formation about latest versions. Note When the machine is connected to th[...]
-
Page 812
Preparing to Print 18 2 • Windows XP Professional On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ] . The [ Print- ers and Faxes ] window ap- pears. Right-click the machine icon, and then click [ Rename ] . • Windows XP Home Edition On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Control Panel ] . Click [ Printers and Other Hardware ] , and then click [ Print[...]
-
Page 813
Installing the Software 19 2 A Quit all applications running. B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [ OK ] . The following languages are availa- ble: Cestina (Czech), Da nsk (Dan- ish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Fran[...]
-
Page 814
Preparing to Print 20 2 Note NetBEUI cannot be used under Windows XP. Machines that respond to a broadcast from the com- puter will be displayed. To print to a machine not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI ad- dress on the netw ork is on the configuration page. For more informat[...]
-
Page 815
Installing the Software 21 2 • For the RPCS™ printer driv- er, click the [ Printer Configura- tion ] b u t t o n o n t h e [ Print Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box. Click the [ User Code ] button. A dia- log box appears. Enter the user code in the dialog box. Note When using the RPCS™ printer driver on Windows 95/98/Me,[...]
-
Page 816
Preparing to Print 22 2 • For IPP, you can configure IPP User Settings, Proxy S ettings and Timeout Settings . Note For more information about these settings, see SmartNet- Monitor for Client Help. Setting Up Options - PCL 6/5e and RPCS If the machine has options installed, you should set the options using the printer driver. Limitation U[...]
-
Page 817
Installing the Software 23 2 RPCS™ printer driver A On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then click [ Printers ] . The [ Printers ] window appears. Note If using Windows XP Profes- sional, click the [ Printers and Fax- es ] window on the [ Start ] menu. If using Windows XP Home Edition, ac cess the [ Printers and Faxes ] [...]
-
Page 818
Preparing to Print 24 2 Note The printer driver wi th the se- lected language w ill be in- stalled. The printer driver will be in- stalled in English if you select the following languages: Cesti- na, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi, Korean and Russian. D Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ] . Add Printer Wizard starts. E Click [ Next ] . [...]
-
Page 819
Installing the Software 25 2 B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [ OK ] . The following languages are availa- ble: Cestina (Czech), Da nsk (Dan- ish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Fran- cais (French), Italiano (Italia[...]
-
Page 820
Preparing to Print 26 2 A On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then click [ Printers ] . The [ Printers ] window appears. Note In Windows XP Professional, click the [ Printers and Faxes ] win- dow on the [ Start ] menu. I n W i n d o w s X P H o m e E d i t i o n , access the [ Printers and Faxes ] window by clicking the [ [...]
-
Page 821
Installing the Software 27 2 Note The printer driver wi th the se- lected language w ill be in- stalled. The printer driver will be in- stalled in English if you select the following languages: Cesti- na, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi, Korean and Russian. D Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ] . Add Printer Wizard starts. E Confirm that[...]
-
Page 822
Preparing to Print 28 2 - Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information such as paper size and feed orientation is automati- cally sent to the computer. You can also check mach ine status from you r computer. • Bidirectional transmissio n is sup- ported under Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, and Windows NT 4[...]
-
Page 823
Installing the Software 29 2 When connecting with IEEE 1394 • The port on the option al IEEE 1394 interface board and the IEEE 1394 port on the computer are connected us ing an interface cable (Windows 2000/XP, Win- dows Me). Note [ SCSI print (SBP-2) ] must be set to Active and [ Bidirectional SCSI print ] must be set to ON in [ IEEE 139[...]
-
Page 824
Preparing to Print 30 2 K Double-click the [ Printer Descrip- tions ] folder in the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder. L Double-click [ Disk 1 ] in the folder of the language you use. M Drag the P PD file int o [ Printer De- scriptions ] in [ Extensions ] in [ System Folder ] . N Restart the Macintosh. Setting up the PPD file Preparation Make sure that the[...]
-
Page 825
Installing the Software 31 2 G Follow the instructions on screen. H Restart the Macintosh. Note Make sure to restart the compu- ter. [ ATM ] will be completely in- stalled only after re starting. I Select [ Control Panel ] fr om the Ap- ple menu, and then click [ ATM ] . J Open the ATM control panel. Note For more information about in- stal[...]
-
Page 826
Preparing to Print 32 2 D Click [ Add ] . Setting up options Limitation You can make settings for all print- er features, even if the necessary option is not installed, due to Mac OS X Native mode limitations. Check which options are installed in the machine before you print. Installing the Printer Dri ver Using USB This section gives ba sic in[...]
-
Page 827
Installing the Software 33 2 H Follow the “plug and play” on the screen to install the printer driv- ers. Note Each printer driver is stored in the following folders on the CD- ROM: • PCL 6: DRIVERSPCL6 WIN9X_ME(Language)DISK1 • PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5E WIN9X_ME(Language)DISK1 • RPCS™: DRIVERSRPCS WIN9X_ME(Language)DISK1 [...]
-
Page 828
Preparing to Print 34 2 Macintosh - Creating a desktop printer icon When you connect the machine and your computer using USB 2.0, create a Desktop Printer icon. Limitation In Mac OS X Native mode, print- ing is disabled when connected to the machine using USB. A Double-click [ Desktop Printer Utility ] in the [ AdobePS Components ] fold- er. B [...]
-
Page 829
Installing the Software 35 2 I f y o u s e n d d a t a f r o m y o u r c o m p u - ter when data is being received from another client computer, your data will be printed after completing the print job for the other client computer. When the machine is connected to the computer properly via the 1394 interface, the appearance of the icon in [...]
-
Page 830
Preparing to Print 36 2 B Confirm that “T his wizard helps you install software for: (printer name)” is displayed, and click [ In- stall from a list or specific location (Ad- vanced) ] , and then click [ Next ] . “Please choose your search and in- stallation option.” appears. C Select the [ Search for the best driver in these locations. ] c[...]
-
Page 831
Installing the Software 37 2 C When “The wizard could not find the software on your computer for..” appears, click [ OK ] . D When “Cannot Install this Hardware” appears, select the [ Don't prompt again to install the software ] check box, and then click [ Finish ] . If [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] ap- pears every time y ou restar[...]
-
Page 832
Preparing to Print 38 2 G Follow the instructions on the screen. Installing Font Manager 2000 Limitation If your operating system is Win- dows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, installing software using Auto Run requires Administrator per- mission. When you install a printer driver using Auto Run, log on us- ing an account that has Adminis- trator per[...]
-
Page 833
Installing the Software 39 2 Note When using Page Maker, optio nal features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be active. The following proced ure describes how to activate the optional print - er features. A On the [ File ] me nu, click [ Print ] . The [ Print Document ] dialog box appears. B Make the necessary settings in the[...]
-
Page 834
Preparing to Print 40 2 Software and Utilities Included on the CD- ROM There are two CD-ROMs that come with the print er option of this ma- chine. The Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e package contains the following CD- ROMs: • Printer Driver s and Utilities • Operating Instructions for Printer/Scanner The CD-ROM labeled “ Printer Driv- ers[...]
-
Page 835
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM 41 2 PCL printer drivers Two kinds of PCL printer drivers: PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this machine. These drivers allow the computer to communicate with the machine via a printer lan- guage. We recommend PCL 6 as your first choice. Note Some applications may req[...]
-
Page 836
Preparing to Print 42 2 USB Printing Support This util ity is for the USB 2. 0 inter- face board. Install this to use USB on computers running Windows 98 SE/Me. For information about installation, see p.32 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”. Acrobat Reader This utility allows you to read PDF files (Portable Document Format). Note[...]
-
Page 837
43 INDEX 1394 Utility , 41 A Acrobat Reader , 42 ATM Macintosh, installing , 30 B Bidirectional tr ansmission , 28 Bypass tray , 12 C CD-ROM , 40 Clear/Stop key , 6 Connection Ethernet board connection , 10 IEEE 1394 interface board connection , 10 Parallel interface connection , 10 USB connection , 10 Control Panel , 5 Custom size paper , 14 print[...]
-
Page 838
44 Q Quick Install , 16 R RPCS , 41 Windows 2000/XP, installing , 18 Windows 95/98/Me, installing , 18 Windows NT 4. 0, installi ng , 18 S Screen fonts Macintosh, installing , 31 SCSI print , 34 SmartNetMonitor for Admin , 37 , 41 SmartNetMonitor for Client , 37 , 41 Software Quick Install , 16 T Thick Paper printing, bypass tray , 14 U USB connect[...]
-
Page 839
45 MEMO[...]
-
Page 840
46 EN USA B654-8617 MEMO[...]
-
Page 841
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operating Instructions Printer Reference 2 For safe and correct use of this machine, plea se be sure to read the Safety Information in the "General Settings Gu ide" before you use it. Setting Up the Prin ter Driver and Canceling a Print Job Using the Document Server Sample Print/Locked Print Troubleshooting[...]
-
Page 842
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operat ing Instructions Printer Reference 2 EN USA B654-8627[...]
-
Page 843
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Important Contents of this manual a[...]
-
Page 844
Copyright © 2003[...]
-
Page 845
i TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ....................................... 1 How to Read This Manual ........................................................ ............................. 3 1. Setting Up the Printer Driv er and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Printer Properties...............[...]
-
Page 846
ii 5. Printer Features Printer Features Menu ......................................................................... ................ 35 Adjusting Printer Features .................................................................. ................ 37 Printer Features Parameters .....................................................................[...]
-
Page 847
1 Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note Manuals provided are specific t o machine type. Adobe Acrobat Reader is nece ssary to view the man uals as a PDF file. Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1“Opera[...]
-
Page 848
2 Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility in cluded on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities”. • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed fr[...]
-
Page 849
3 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the follo wing symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result[...]
-
Page 850
4[...]
-
Page 851
5 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties Changing default settings A On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then click [ Printers ] . The [ Printers ] window appears. B Click the icon of the machine whose default you want to change. C On [...]
-
Page 852
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 Windows 2000/XP - Accessing Printer Properties Changing default settings - Printer properties Limitation Changing machine settings re- quires Manage Printers permis- sion. Members of Administrators and Power User s groups have Manage Printers permission by de- fault. When you se t up o[...]
-
Page 853
Accessing Printer Properties 7 1 C On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences... ] . The [ Printing Preference s ] dialog box appears. D Make the settings you require, and then click [ OK ] . Note Settings you make he re are used as default for all applications. Making settings from an application To make settings for a specific appli- [...]
-
Page 854
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 D Make the settings you require, and then click [ OK ] . Note Normally you do not have to change the “Form to Tray As- signment” settings on the [ De- vice Settings ] tab in the PostScript 3 printer driver. Settings you make he re are used as default for all applications. Chang[...]
-
Page 855
Accessing Printer Properties 9 1 Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing Making paper settings from an application A Open the file you want to print. B On the [ File ] menu, click [ Page Set- up ] . The [ AdobePS Page Setup ] dialog box appears. C Make sure the machine you want to use is shown in the [ Format for: ] box. Note In Mac OS X, this is c[...]
-
Page 856
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows - Canceling a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar. A window appears, sh owing all print jobs currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. B Select the name o f the job you want to cancel. [...]
-
Page 857
Canceling a Print Job 11 1 Note You cannot st op printing data that has already been proc- essed. For this reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [ Job Reset ] . A print job con taining a la rge volume of data may take con- siderable time to sto p. Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on t[...]
-
Page 858
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 12 1[...]
-
Page 859
13 2. Using the Document Server Accessing the Document Server The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard disk, allowing you to edit an d print as and when you want. Limitation Applications with their own drivers, su ch as PageM aker, do not support this function. Reference For more information about Docu ment [...]
-
Page 860
Using the Document Server 14 2 The Document Server also st ores fi les scanned using the Automatic Docu- ment Feeder (ADF) or exposure glass. You should delete unnecessary stored files once in a while so as n ot to exceed the capacity of the hard disk. For how to delete stored files, see General Settings Guide . When using the hard disk for[...]
-
Page 861
15 3. Sample Print/Locked Print Sample Print Use this functi on to print only th e first set of a multiple-set print job. After you have checked the result, re main- ing sets can be printed or ca nceled us- ing the machine's control panel. This can reduce misprints due to mistakes in content or settings. Note If the application has a colla[...]
-
Page 862
Sample Print/Locked Print 16 3 C On the machine's control panel, press the { Printer } key to display the Printer screen. D Press [ View Sample Print jobs ] . A list of the sample print files stored in the machine appears. The following items also appear: • User ID: The user ID set up by the printer driver. • Date/Tim e : The date and time[...]
-
Page 863
Sample Print 17 3 Deleting a Sample Print File If you are not satisfied w ith the sam- ple printout, you can delete the sam- ple print file, revise it and print it again until the settings are suitable. A Press the { Printer } key to display the Printer screen. B Press [ View Sample Print jobs ] . A list of sample print files stored in the machine [...]
-
Page 864
Sample Print/Locked Print 18 3 Locked Print Use this function to main tain privacy when printing confidential docu- ments on the machine over a shared network. Usually, it is possible to print data using the display panel once it is stored in this machine. When using Locked Print, it is not possible to print unless a password is entered on the mach[...]
-
Page 865
Locked Print 19 3 A list of stored lock ed print files appears. The following items also appear: • User ID: The user ID set up by the printer driver. • Date/Time: Th e date and time when the job was sent from the computer. E Select the file you want to print by pressing it. Note Press [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next. ] to scroll thro ugh the list. [...]
-
Page 866
Sample Print/Locked Print 20 3 F Press [ Yes ] . After the file has been deleted, the file list screen returns. Note If you do not wa nt to delete the file, press [ No ] . If you forget your password, se- lect [ Unlock ] from [ V Temporarily Unlock Files ] in [ Password Manage- ment for Stored Files ] on the [ Key Operator Tools ] tab of th[...]
-
Page 867
Form Feed 21 3 Form Feed This section g ives instru ctions for op- erating the machine when there is no tray for the selected paper size or type, or when paper loaded in the machine has run out. Limitation The tray canno t be changed if the following functions are set for it: •S t a p l e •P u n c h • Duplex Print to a tray th at does not[...]
-
Page 868
Sample Print/Locked Print 22 3 Canceling Form Feed A Press [ Reset ] . Delete the stored print job, and then cancel form feed. B Press [ Res et Current Job ] or [ Reset All Jobs ] . • [ Reset Current Job ] : cancels the print job currently being proc- essed. • [ Reset All Jobs ] : cancels all jobs in the print queue. • [ Resume Printing ] : r[...]
-
Page 869
23 4. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel This section describes the principal mess ages that appear on the pan el display. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message . Reference Before turnin g the main power off, see ‘Tu rning On the Powe r’, General Set- tings Guide. Status messages[...]
-
Page 870
Troubleshooting 24 4 DIMM has a problem. An error h as occurred in the DIMM inside the machine. Contact your sales or service representative. Driver setting error. (Memo- ry) There is an error in the down- loaded font(s). Reset the parameter for down- loading fonts. Insufficient memory or memo- ry settings for the printer driv- er may not match mem[...]
-
Page 871
Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel 25 4 Exceeded max. pages. Collate is incomplete. The maximum number of pag- es has been exceeded for colla- tion. Turn off the main power switch, and back on again. Re- duce the number of pages to be printed. If the message ap- pears again, contact your sales or service representative. Finisher is in[...]
-
Page 872
Troubleshooting 26 4 NV-RAM has a problem. An error has occurred in the optional memory unit. Turn off the main power switch, and back on again. If the message appears again, call your sales or service repre- sentativ e. Output tray has been changed. The output tray has been changed because of the paper size limitation of the selected tray. Select [...]
-
Page 873
Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel 27 4 RPCS syntax error. Bidirection al transmission may not be working properly, or the RPCS™ printer driver settings may not b e correct. Confirm the option setting s for the printer driver matc h the options installed on the machine. Selected paper tray is in use for another function. Please wait[...]
-
Page 874
Troubleshooting 28 4 The Machine Does Not Print Possible Cause Solutions Is the power on? Check the cable is secure ly plugged into the power outlet and the machine. Turn on the main power switch. Is the machine online? If not, press [ f Online ] on the display panel. Does the printer funct ion status indicator stay red? If so, check the error mess[...]
-
Page 875
The Machine Does Not Print 29 4 When using wireless LAN, is the access point correctly set? Check access point settings when in in frastructure mode. De pend- ing on the access point, client access may be limited by MAC ad- dress. Also, check there are no pr oblems in transmission between access point and wired clients, and between access point and[...]
-
Page 876
Troubleshooting 30 4 Problem Solutions Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job? If not, data is not being se nt to the machine. When the machine is connect ed to the computer using the interface cable Check the machine port se ttings are correct. For parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 sho uld be set. • W[...]
-
Page 877
Other Printing Problems 31 4 Other Printing Problems Problem Causes and Solutions The print on the entire page is fad- ed. If [ Toner Saving ] is selected on the [ Print Quality ] tab in the printer driver, the entire page will be faded when printed. See the printer driver Help. Print is smudges. Settings for thick paper have no t been made when pr[...]
-
Page 878
Troubleshooting 32 4 A print instruc- tion was issued from the compu- ter, but printing did not start. User code management may have been set. Ask the administrator about valid user codes. To print, the us er code must b e entered f rom the printer driver. The print job is not canceled even when the machine is switched to of- fline status. Even whe[...]
-
Page 879
Other Printing Problems 33 4 It takes too much time to resume printing. The data is so large or complex that it takes tim e to process. If the Data In indicator is blinking, data is being proc essed. Simply wait until printing resumes. The machine was in Energy Save r mode. To resume from Energy Saver mode, it has to warm up, and this takes time. T[...]
-
Page 880
Troubleshooting 34 4 Note If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative. No transmission when using 1394 interface connec- tion Check using the following procedure: A Confirm the IEEE 1394 interface cable is connected securely. B Restart the computer. If the error occurs even after execut ing the above operation,[...]
-
Page 881
35 5. Printer Features Reference For more information about copier features and syste m settings , see Copy Ref- erence and General Settings Guide . Printer Features Menu There are sev en menu items in the Printer Featur es menu: •P a p e r I n p u t • List/Test Print •M a i n t e n a n c e •S y s t e m •H o s t I n t e r f a c e •P C L[...]
-
Page 882
Printer Features 36 5 *1 Appears when the PostScript 3 unit (optional) is installed. *2 Appears when the finisher (optional) is installed. System See p.42 “System”. Print Error Repor t Auto Continue Memory Overflow Job Separation *2 Memory Usage Duplex Copies Edge Smoothing Toner Saving Printer Language Sub Paper Size Page Size Letterhead Setti[...]
-
Page 883
Adjusting Printer Features 37 5 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features allows ba sic adjustment of operations when u sing the machine as a printe r. Although factory default settings are suit able for most printing jobs, Printer Fea- tures gives you access to a n u m b e r o f s e t t i n g s t h a t control basic printer opera- tions. Printer[...]
-
Page 884
Printer Features 38 5 Printer Features Parameters Paper Input Bypass Paper Size The size of the paper set in the by- pass tray. Reference For more information about pa- per sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see General Settings Guide . For information about setting paper in the bypass tray, see Printer Reference 1 . Note Default: ?[...]
-
Page 885
Printer Features Parameters 39 5 Interpreting the configuration page System Reference Unit Number Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer. Total Memory Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer. Firmware Version •F i r m w a r e Displays the version number of the printe r firmwar[...]
-
Page 886
Printer Features 40 5 System Displays the settings made under the System menu. Reference p.42 “System” PCL Menu Displays the settings you made under PCL Menu. Reference p.45 “PCL Menu” PS Menu Displays the settings you made under PS Menu. Reference p.46 “PS Menu” Host Interface Displays the settings you made under the Hos t Interface me[...]
-
Page 887
Printer Features Parameters 41 5 Maintenance Menu Protect This procedure lets you protect menu settings from accidental change. It makes it impossible to cha ng e m en u se tt in gs wi th n or ma l procedures unless you perform the required key operations. In a net- work environment, only adminis- trators can make changes to menu settings. • [...]
-
Page 888
Printer Features 42 5 Temporarily canceling Menu Protect When you select protected items in Printer Features, a screen for entering the access codes appears. When this happens, enter the correct access codes using the number keys, and then press [ OK ] . Menu Protect is then temporarily canceled. Note If you enter the correct access codes, Menu[...]
-
Page 889
Printer Features Parameters 43 5 Copies You can specify the number of print sets. This sett ing is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another command. • 1 to 999 by 1 Note Default: 1 Edge Smoothing Set this to enable Edge Smoothing. •O n •O f f Note Default: On If Toner S[...]
-
Page 890
Printer Features 44 5 Letterhead Setting You can rotate original images when printing. When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore, output might not be as expected when printing onto let- terhead or preprinted paper re- quiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image ro - tation. •O f f •A u t[...]
-
Page 891
Printer Features Parameters 45 5 PCL Menu Orientation You can set the page orientation. •P o r t r a i t •L a n d s c a p e Note Default: Portrait Form Lines You can set the number of lines per page. • 5 to 128 by 1 Note Default: •M e t r i c v e r s i o n : 6 4 • Inch version: 60 Font Source You can set the storage lo[...]
-
Page 892
Printer Features 46 5 Extend A4 Width You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with PCL). •O n •O f f Note Default: Off When the setting is O n, the width will be 8 / inches. Append CR to LF When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR − LF, FF=CR − FF. •O f f •O n N[...]
-
Page 893
47 6. Appendix Finisher You can collate, staple or punch holes i n printed paper by in stalling the optional finisher. Ma ke sure you read the follo wi ng precautions when using the optional finish er: Reference For informatio n about opti onal finish ers, see General Se ttings Guide . To use the staple function, see p.48 “Staple”. To use the p[...]
-
Page 894
Appendix 48 6 Staple With the optional finisher ins talled, sets can be stapled indi vidually when print- ing multiple sets. Staple Position The specified staple position varies depe nding on paper size, type, quantity and feed orientation. The foll owing table shows staple positions: Paper Orientation on the Machine Print Data Direction Staple Pos[...]
-
Page 895
Staple 49 6 Reference • For paper sizes and maximum numbers of sheets available for stapling, see “Specifications”, General Settings Guide . • For printing methods, see the printer driver Help. • The staple position will vary when using the Po stScript 3 printer driver. For more information, see the Po stScript 3 printe r driver Help. Pap[...]
-
Page 896
Appendix 50 6 Stapling Precautions Limitation Stapling can be done only with the option al finisher installed. Stapling cannot be done when pa per is fed from the bypass tray. You cannot interrupt the current job with a job for another function requiring stapling or collating. Note When the finisher is installed, and when an output [...]
-
Page 897
Staple 51 6 Staple printing will be canceled under the following conditions: • If the num ber of staple jobs exceeds maximum. F or information abo ut the maximum number, see “Specifications”, General Settings Guide . • If a paper size that canno t be stapled is selected. For information about pa- per sizes that can be stapled, see “Sp[...]
-
Page 898
Appendix 52 6 Punch With the optional finisher inst alled, ho les can be punched into printed ou tput. Punch Position The specified punch position varies depe nding on paper feed and print data ori- entation. The followin g table shows punc h positions: Note Punch positions will vary slightly from p a g e t o p a g e a s h o l e s a r e p u n c[...]
-
Page 899
Punch 53 6 Punching Precautions Limitation Punching cannot be do ne when paper i s fed from the bypass tray. Note If you cannot make punch set tings even with the fini sher installed, options may not be set correctly in the printer driver. Co rrect option settings in the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help. When dup[...]
-
Page 900
Appendix 54 6 Collate When printing multiple do cuments such as handouts for meetings, you can sep- arate sets into order. This function is known as “Collate”. Collate stores data transmitted from a computer in memory. The following are the three types of collate: Collate Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order. Rotating[...]
-
Page 901
Collate 55 6 Note You can set Collate in th e RPCS™ printer driver. • If you cannot make Shift Collate even with the optional finisher installed, options may not be set up correctly in the printer driver. Correct the printer driver's option settings. For details, see the printer driver Help. If Auto Continue occurs on the fi rst se[...]
-
Page 902
Appendix 56 6 Spool Printing Spool Printing allows print jobs transferred from a compu ter to be temporarily stored, and then prints them after they are transferred. This shortens printing time as it maximizes printer efficiency. Important During Spool Printing, the hard disk is accessed and the Data -In indicator blinks. Turning off the comput[...]
-
Page 903
Spool Printing 57 6 - Setting Spool Printing Spool Printing can be set using telnet o r a Web browser. • Using a Web browser Click [ Configuration ] , and then click [ General ] . Se t [ Spool Printing ] to [ Enable ] . See Network Guide or Help for more information. •U s i n g t e l n e t Type in “sp oolsw spool o n” to set Spoo l Printing[...]
-
Page 904
Appendix 58 6 Covers Using this function, you can in sert cover and back sheets fed from a diffe rent tray to that of the main paper, an d print on them. Reference For printing methods, see the printer driver Help. Limitation To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collat e cannot be set. Note The cover sheets should be the same[...]
-
Page 905
Covers 59 6 •B l a n k Front/Back covers Prints the first and last page of the do cument as the cover and back cover pag- es. • Print on one side Prints on one side of the cover sheets only, even when duplex printing is selected. • Print on both sides Prints on both sides of the cover sheets when duplex printing is selected. • B l a n k[...]
-
Page 906
Appendix 60 6 Slip Sheets Inserting a slip sheet between each page •P r i n t •B l a n k Inserting a slip sheet be tween OHP transparencies •P r i n t •B l a n k GP A Y019E GP A Y020E 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 GCPY021E 2 2 2 1 1 1 GCPY022E[...]
-
Page 907
Slip Sheets 61 6 Note Collate cannot be set wh en using slip sheets. Slip sheets cannot be inse rted while duplex printing. The slip she et should be the s ame si ze and orientation as the ma in paper. The same paper feed tray cannot be se t for the main paper and slip sheets.[...]
-
Page 908
Appendix 62 6 Chaptering A specified page is printed on the same side as the firs t page, like a book. Also, you can insert slip sheets before specif ied pages, and select whe ther or not to print onto slip s heets. Limitation This function is available with the PCL and RPCS™ printer driver. Reference For printing methods, see the printer dri[...]
-
Page 909
Chaptering 63 6 • Print on front side only Prints on the front side of slip sheets even if duplex printing is selected. •B l a n k Note The slip sheet should be the same si ze and orientation a s the main pap er. If Auto Tray Select is set as the pape r feed tray for the main paper, paper will be delivered from a tr ay containing paper [...]
-
Page 910
Appendix 64 6 User Defined Pages Using this function, you can specify th e page numbers for each input tray. Reference For printing methods, see the printer driver Help. Limitation This functio n is available wi th the PCL printer driver only. If [ Document Server ] is selected under [ Job Type ] , User Defined Page cannot be used. If [[...]
-
Page 911
System Settings (Parallel Connection) 65 6 System Settings (Parallel Connection) Interface Settings/Parallel Interface Parallel Timing Specifies the timing for the parallel interface. Normally, you do not need to change this setting. •A C K i n s i d e •A C K o u t s i d e •S T B d o w n Note Default: ACK outside Parallel Communic[...]
-
Page 912
Appendix 66 6 Specifications This section contains the machine's elec trical and hardware specificati ons, in- cluding information about its options. Component Specifications Resolution PCL 6 : 600 dpi PCL 5e: 300 dpi, 600 dpi RPCS™ : 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 600 dpi PostScript 3 : 300 dpi, 600 dpi Printing speed 35 ppm/45 ppm (A4 K , 8 / " ×[...]
-
Page 913
Specifications 67 6 *1 To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor port. Options Limitation Only one optional interface board can be i nstalled in the machine at a time. Therefore, the optional IEEE 1394 interf ace board, the opti onal 802.11b inter- face kit (wireless LAN board) and the optional USB 2.0 interface board cannot be installed concurre[...]
-
Page 914
Appendix 68 6 Data transfer speed: Maximum 400 Mbps Connectable number of devices on a bus: Maximum 63 Allowed cable hops on a bus: Maximum 16 Power supply: Non external power supply Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant) IEEE 802.11b Interface Kit Type B Transmission spec.: Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Pro[...]
-
Page 915
Specifications 69 6 USB2.0 Interface Board Type A Transmission spec: Based on USB 2.0 Data transfer speed: High Speed: 480 Mbps Full Speed: 12 Mb ps Supported operating system: Windows 98 SE/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Mac OS 9.x, Mac OS X Classic Note This USB 2.0 interface board is compat ible with devices that support USB 1.1. For W[...]
-
Page 916
70 INDEX C Canceling a job Macintosh , 11 Windows , 10 Chaptering , 62 Collate , 54 Configuration page , 38 Control panel locked print , 15 printer features, adjusting , 35 sample print , 15 Covers , 58 D Data In indicator , 30 , 32 , 33 Display panel error messages , 23 Document Server , 13 E Error messages , 23 F Finisher , 47 Fonts , 66 H Hard d[...]
-
Page 917
71 T Troubleshooting , 23 error messages , 23 machine does not print , 28 other printing problems , 31 status messages , 23 U USB2.0 Interface Board Type A , 69 W Windows canceling a job , 10 Windows 2000/XP printer properties, printer driver , 6 Windows 95/98/Me printer properties, printer driver , 5 Windows NT 4. 0 printer properties, printer dri[...]
-
Page 918
72 EN USA B654-8627[...]
-
Page 919
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operating Instructions Scanner Reference For safe and correct use of this machine, plea se be sure to read the Safety Information in the General Settings Guide be fore you use it. Network Scanner Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner Setting Originals Sending Scan File by E-mail Sending Scan File by Scan to Folde[...]
-
Page 920
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2045e Operat ing Instructions Scanner Reference EN USA B654-8707[...]
-
Page 921
Introduction This manual describe s detailed instruction s on the o peration and notes abou t the use of this machin e. To get maximum versatility from this mach ine all op erators are requ ested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a ha ndy place near the machine. Scanner function is ava ilable when[...]
-
Page 922
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the fol lowing symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON. c means STAND BY. Note to users in the United States of Americ a Notice: This equipment has been tested and fo und to comply wi th th e limits for a Class B digital device , pursu- ant to Part 15 of the FCC R ules. These limits ar e d[...]
-
Page 923
i Manuals for This Machine The following manu als describe the operat ional procedures of this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note r The manuals provided are specific to machine type. r Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view the PDF file manuals. r Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 "Operating I[...]
-
Page 924
ii v Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility incl uded on the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner Driver & Document Ma nagement Utilities". • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes the installation of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, and the operating en - vironment for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite in detai[...]
-
Page 925
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine .............................................. ........................................ i How to Read This Manual ........................................................ ............................. 1 Symbols ........... .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .....[...]
-
Page 926
iv 4. Sending Scan File by E-mail Preparation for Sending by E-mail .......................................... ........................... 45 E-mail Screen...................... .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. . 46 Sending Scan File by E-mail .......................................... ......[...]
-
Page 927
v 9. Appendix Relationship between Resolution and File Size................................................ 99 When Using as E-mai l, Scan to Fol der, Document Ser ver or Network Delivery Scan ner ... 99 When Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner .... ......... .............. .............. ................. . 100 Relationship between File Type Specifie[...]
-
Page 928
vi[...]
-
Page 929
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the follo wing symbols are used: Important If this instruction is no t followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or f iles might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicate s the prior know ledg e or prepa rations require d before op- erating. Note This symbol [...]
-
Page 930
2[...]
-
Page 931
3 1. Network Scanner Outline By installing the printer/scanner controll er, the machine can be used as a ne t- work scanner. As a network scanner, the machine can se nd e-mail, send files to the FTP server or the shared folders of client computers, store scan files in the Document Server, operate as a network delivery scanner, and operate as a netw[...]
-
Page 932
Network Scanner 4 1 3. Client computer An e-mail with scan file attached is re- ceived from the e-mail server using e- mail software. Check the content of the file using an ap- plication appropriate for the file type. 4. LDAP server LDAP server provides a directory service corresponding to the inquiry or reference operation from the client computer[...]
-
Page 933
Outline 5 1 3. Client computer Scan file that is sent from the machine is received in the shared folders of Win- dows. Check the content of the file using an ap- plication appropriate for the file type. Document Server Scan file from the originals is stored as a file on the hard disk of the machine and can be viewed, copied, deleted, or retr ieving[...]
-
Page 934
Network Scanner 6 1 Network Delivery Scanner The machine is used as a deli very scan ner with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profession- al. Scan file from the originals scanned by the machine is stored in the delivery server and delivered to the folders of client computers on the same network. Reference p.85 “Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function” N[...]
-
Page 935
Outline 7 1 Reference For more information about ScanRouter V2 Lite, DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, or Auto Document Link, see the respective documentation. See p.i “Manuals for This Machine”. Network TWAIN Scanner The scanning function of th is machine can be used from a client computer via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) [optional], or [...]
-
Page 936
Network Scanner 8 1 Control Panel This illustration shows the control panel when options are installed. 1. { User Tools/Counter } key Use to change default or operation pa- rameters according to the operating con- ditions. 2. Display panel Displays the operation status and mes- sages. 3. { Check Modes } key Press to check the destinations which are[...]
-
Page 937
Control Panel 9 1 10. Indicators Display errors and the machine status. d : Add Staple indicator D : Add Toner indicator B : Add Paper indicator L : Service Call indicator M : Open Cover indicator x : Misfeed indicator Reference For more informat ion, see General Settings Guide . 11. Function status indicators • When lit green, the corresponding [...]
-
Page 938
Network Scanner 10 1 Display Contents This section e xplains the n o rmal screen configuration. The display's contents differ depending on the function. Note r The Copy screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this s etting in the System Settings. See General Settings Guide . Using e-mail Press the { Sc[...]
-
Page 939
Control Panel 11 1 Using as a networ k delivery scanner Press the { Scanner } key to display the Network Deli very Scanner screen (when [ Delivery Serv er ] has been selected in [ Destination List Display Priority 1 ] ). If the Ne t- work TWAIN Scann e r s c reen appears, press [ Exi t ] . Reference For information about Destination List Prior ity,[...]
-
Page 940
Network Scanner 12 1[...]
-
Page 941
13 2. Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner To use the machine as a network scanner, you must make settings required for use as a scanner as well as basi c settings for us e in a network. Reference First, see General Settings Guide for details about how to make basic settings, and then make scanner settings. For more information about settin gs[...]
-
Page 942
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 14 2 v Destination List Settings For explanations of settings, see p.20 “Destinat ion List Settings”. Note r [ Destination List Display Priority 1 ] and [ U pdate Delivery Server Des tination List ] will not be displayed when [ OFF ] is selected for [ Delivery Option ] in [ File Transfer ] of System Set[...]
-
Page 943
Initial Scanner Setup 15 2 Setting procedure A Press the { User Tools/Counter } key. B Press [ Scanner Features ] . C Press [ Send Settings ] . D Press the item to be set. Example: TWAIN Standby Time setting E Change the setting. • To select an item, touch its key on the screen. The item is highlighted. • To enter numbers, use the number keys. [...]
-
Page 944
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 16 2 Scan Settings This section explains how to set the defaults for scan settings. The scan settings consist of the fol- lowing. For the list about settings and defaults, see p.13 “S canner Featur es”. v Default Scan Settings Various basic settings (scan type, resolution, image density, scan size) can [...]
-
Page 945
Initial Scanner Setup 17 2 Note r If either [ SADF ] or [ Batch ] is specified when scanning, this setting is invalid. r If [ Off ] is selected, sending will start automatically after one page of original is scanned. r If [ Set Wait Time ] is selected, en- ter the waiting time in seconds (3-999) for placing additional originals with the number keys[...]
-
Page 946
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 18 2 r If a paper jam occurs or any of the following operation is per- formed while the machine is waiting f or addition al original s, the countdown stops and does not start again until the { # } key is pressed. • Changing the setti ngs such as the scan settings • Opening the upper cover of the ADF •[...]
-
Page 947
Initial Scanner Setup 19 2 v Change Initial Mode If you use the settings which are displayed when modes are cleared, reset, or immediate ly after the op- eration switch is turned on as th e initial mode, select [ Standard ] . Select [ Program No.10 ] when you use the settings stored in Program No.10 as the initial mode. Selecting a custom size When[...]
-
Page 948
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 20 2 •S c a n S i z e X3: 10 - 432 mm (0.4” - 17.0”) Y3: 10 - 297 mm (0.4” - 11.7”) Keep the scan area settings within these ra nge. E When all dimensions are entered, press [ OK ] . F Make sure that the area specified in step D (X3 and Y3) is shown in the [ Custom size ] field, and then press [ O[...]
-
Page 949
Initial Scanner Setup 21 2 Send Settings This section explains how to set the defaults for sending settings such as the compressio n level for scan f ile and how the machine switches to the network TWAIN scanner function. The send settings consist of the fol- lowing. For the list about settings and defaults, see p.13 “S canner Featur es”. v TWA[...]
-
Page 950
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 22 2 v Max. E-mail Size Select whether the size of an e-mail is limited or not. When [ On ] is selected, enter the size limit (64 - 102400 KB) with the number keys. Note r When the SMTP limits the size, match that settin g. v Divide & Send E-mail This function is effective only when [ On ] is selected f[...]
-
Page 951
Programs 23 2 Programs You can store frequently used set- tings in the machine memory and re- call them for future use. Note r You can store up to 10 programs for the scanner mode. r You can use the settings stored in program No.10 as the initial mode by selecting [ Program No.10 ] in [ Change Initial Mode ] in [ Scanner Fea- tures ] . r Programs a[...]
-
Page 952
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 24 2 Recalling a Program A Make sure the { Scanner } key is se- lected, press the { Program } key. B Press [ R e cal l ] . C Press the number of the program you want to recall. The stored sett ings are displayed. Note r Program numbers with m al- ready have settings in them. D Place the originals, and then [...]
-
Page 953
Installing Software 25 2 Installing Software The machine comes with two CD- ROMs containing various software. The CD-ROM labeled “Scann er Driver & Document Manageme nt Utilities” con- tains the necessary software to use the machine as a network scanner. The CD- ROM labeled “ Printer Driv er & Utilit ies” contains t he necessary sof[...]
-
Page 954
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 26 2 The installing sequence using Auto Run is as follows: For information about the software that can be installed by Auto Run, see p.29 “Software Supplied on CD- ROM”. Installation Sequence The installer starts up. The installation complete message is displayed. Select the software. Insert the CD-ROM.[...]
-
Page 955
Installing Software 27 2 Software for Using a Network TWAIN Scanner To use the machine as a network TWAIN sc anner, i t is essential to install the TWAIN driver. If you do not have applications that wo r k w i t h T W A I N , i t i s n e c e s s a r y t o a l s o install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. For inform ation about the installation of Desk- TopBin[...]
-
Page 956
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 28 2 Software for Using the Networ k Delivery Scanner Function To use the machine as a network delivery sc anner, it is essential to install Scan- Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To ch eck an in-tray or retrieve file, it is nec- essary to instal l TWAIN Driv er on the client compute r. Use Auto Run f[...]
-
Page 957
Installing Software 29 2 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Use Auto Run for installati on. Preparation Before installation, check the system re quirements for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. See p.31 “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”. A Start Windows, and then insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilitie s” i nto the CD-ROM drive [...]
-
Page 958
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 30 2 Type2045e TWAIN Driver This driver is required to sc an an original on the machine. To use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, this driver must be installed. v File storage folder The files are stored i n the following fo lder on the CD-ROM provided with this machine: DRIVERSTWAIN v System requir[...]
-
Page 959
Installing Software 31 2 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is to be installe d on the client comp uters for integration and management of v arious kinds of file su ch as scan file, files created with ap- plications, and existing scan files. This software allows you to use various func- tions for scan files stored in the Document Server, e[...]
-
Page 960
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 32 2 v Software installed with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite •A u t o D o c u m e n t L i n k A u t o D o c u m e n t L i n k o n t h e c l i e n t c o m p u t e r m o n i t o r s i n - t r a y s o f t h e d e l i v - ery server. In addition, the file delivere d to in-trays can be retrieved or the arrival of file[...]
-
Page 961
Installing Software 33 2 • Operating system Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or lat er) Microsoft Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Se rvice Pack 1 or later) Microsoft Windows 2000 Profession al (Service Pack 1 or later) Microsoft Windows N[...]
-
Page 962
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 34 2[...]
-
Page 963
35 3. Setting Originals This chapter explains the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass and in the ADF, and setting the original scan area and orientation according to the placemen t method. To correctly di splay the top/bot tom orient ation of th e scanned orig inal on a cli- ent computer, the placement of the original and the sett[...]
-
Page 964
Setting Originals 36 3 Placing on the Exposure Glass Originals which do not fit int o the ADF, such as sheets with glued-on parts, books, etc., can be placed di- rectly on the exposure glass for scan- ning. Note r For information about the origi- nals which can be placed on the ex- posure glass, see Copy Reference . A Lift the exposure glass cover [...]
-
Page 965
Placing Originals 37 3 v When placing the original so that the top edge touches the top left of the exposure glass When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, this orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN driver. Nor- mally, use this orientation for placing ori ginals. 1. Positioning mark C Lower the exposure glass cover or the AD[...]
-
Page 966
Setting Originals 38 3 v When placing the originals so that the top edges touch the back of the ADF v When placing the top edges of the originals first When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, this orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN driver. Nor- mally, use this orientation for placement. Note r Originals with different si[...]
-
Page 967
Original Orientation and Scan Area 39 3 Original Orientation and Scan Area To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of a scanned original on a client computer, original orientation and page flow must be set when plac- ing the original. When using the e-mail function, the Scan to Folder function, the Docu- ment Server function, and the net- w[...]
-
Page 968
Setting Originals 40 3 For E-mail, Scan to Folder, and a Network Delivery Scanner A Make settings for one-sided/two- sided combination , Batch/SADF, mixed original sizes, and original orientation. Note r The defaults can be changed us- ing the initial scan settings [ Orig- inal Setting ] , [ Original Feed Type Priority ] , [ Mixed Original Sizes Pr[...]
-
Page 969
Original Orientation and Scan Area 41 3 Mixed size selection A When originals of different sizes are placed, select [ Mixed Size ] . Note r If [ Mixed Size ] is selected and [ Auto Detect ] is selected for scan size, the maximum size detected is set as the scan size. For originals smaller than this size, a blank space will appear in the resulting i[...]
-
Page 970
Setting Originals 42 3 Scanning Originals in Several Times Multiple originals can be scanned as a single file by dividing them and scan- ning them using the exposure glass or the ADF. When scanning orig inals di- viding in several times, there are two waiting status for setting additional originals: the machine waits for a des- ignated time, or kee[...]
-
Page 971
Original Orientation and Scan Area 43 3 Note r When the scan settings are changed while performing the procedure, the count- down for additional origi- nals is stopped. Press the { Start } key to restart the countdown. When using the ADF A Select [ SADF ] in [ Original Feed Type ] . B Press the { Start } key. When scanning is finished, the remainde[...]
-
Page 972
Setting Originals 44 3 E Press the { Start } key. F When there are additional origi- nals to scan, place them and press the { Start } key. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned. G After all originals are scanned, press the { # } key. Storing or sending will start.[...]
-
Page 973
45 4. Sending Scan File by E-mail Scan file can be sent from this machine to a specified destination using e-mail system. This chapter explains the prepar ation for sending file by e-mail system, various display screens, procedures for sending, and how to che ck the sending result when this fu nction is used. Preparation for Sending by E-mail To se[...]
-
Page 974
Sending Scan File by E-mail 46 4 E-mail Screen The screen when using the machine for e-mail is as shown. 1. Destination field The selected destination is shown here. If multiple destinations are selected, the destinations are displayed in the order they were selected by pressing [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next ] . Note r Pressing the { Check Modes } key le[...]
-
Page 975
Sending Scan File by E-mail 47 4 Sending Scan File by E-mail Procedure for Sending E-mail Scan file is sent after specifying scan settings and destinations. A Press the { Scanner } key. B If user codes are set, enter a user code with the nu mber keys, and then press the { # } key. The Scanner Function screen ap- pears. Reference For information abo[...]
-
Page 976
Sending Scan File by E-mail 48 4 E If the network delivery scanner screen appears, switch to the screen for sending e-mail. A Press [] . B Press [ Switch Destination List ] . C Press [ E-mail ] . D Press [ Exit ] . The E-mail screen appears. F Specify the destination. To specify a dest ination, you ca n select it from the list, select it by specify[...]
-
Page 977
Sending Scan File by E-mail 49 4 Using a registration number to select a destination A Press [ Registration No. ] . B Use the number keys to enter the five-digit registration number that has been assigned to a destination. If the entered number is less than five digits long, press the { # } key after the last number. Example: To enter 00005 Press t[...]
-
Page 978
Sending Scan File by E-mail 50 4 Searching to select a destination from the Destination List A Press [] . B Press [ Search by Dest. Name ] . Note r To search using e-mail ad- dresses, press [ E-mail Ad- dress ] . The soft keyboard is displayed for entering a user name. C Enter part of the destination name. Note r Enter the first characte r or chara[...]
-
Page 979
Sending Scan File by E-mail 51 4 Note r Press the item, and the soft keyboard is displ ayed for en- tering inform ation appears. Enter the first character or characters of the item. r One reference item of Ad- vanced Search can be added when [ Search Options ] is spec- ified in [ Program/ Change LDAP Server ] of [ Key Operator Tools ] of [ Sy stem [...]
-
Page 980
Sending Scan File by E-mail 52 4 H Press [ Exit ] . Note r A searched e-mail address can be registered in the list. Press [ ProgDest ] , and a screen for entering the address ap- pears. For information about registering destinations, see General Settings Guide . Checking selected destinations A Use the destination field at t he top of the screen to[...]
-
Page 981
Sending Scan File by E-mail 53 4 When selecting a s ender from the list A Press [ Attach Sender's Na me ] . B Select the sender. Note r When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code appears after selecting the sender. En- ter the protection code, and then press [ OK ] . When the protection code you entered is c[...]
-
Page 982
Sending Scan File by E-mail 54 4 Note r When [ Return Receipt ] is se- lected, an e-mail notifying that the e-mail has been read by the destination pa rty is sent to the sender selected here. However, if the mailing software used by the destina- tion party does not support MDN (Message Disposition Notification), the e-mail may not be sent. D Press [...]
-
Page 983
Sending Scan File by E-mail 55 4 Note r When [ Return Receipt ] is select- ed, an e-mail notifying that the e-mail has been read by the destination party is sent to the sender selected here. However, if the mailing soft- ware used by the destination party does not support MDN (Message Disposition Notifi- cation), the setting in [ Return Receipt ] b[...]
-
Page 984
Sending Scan File by E-mail 56 4 When selecting a message from the list A Press [ Subject/Message ] . B Press [ E-mail Message ] . C Select a message. D Press [ OK ] twice. Manual entry of a message The operation to specify a message “Thank you for wha t you did yes- terday.” is explained as an exam- ple here. A Press [ Subject/Message ] . B Pr[...]
-
Page 985
Sending Scan File by E-mail 57 4 Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail You can use e-mail with the Docu- ment Server. Scan file is stored in the Document Server at the same time the file is sent by e-mail. Note r This section expla ins mainly the operation for simu ltaneous storage and sending of e-mail. For mo re in- formation, see p.47 “Pr[...]
-
Page 986
Sending Scan File by E-mail 58 4 Checking the Status of E-mail The status of the last 100 sendings can be checked. For every new sendin g record after 100, the oldest record is deleted. Note r When [ Print & Delete Sc anner Jour- nal ] is set to [ Delete all after printing ] , the whole journal is printed when the number of records reaches 100 [...]
-
Page 987
59 5. Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder S c a n f i l e c a n b e s e n t t o t h e f o l d e r s o f t h e F T P s e r v e r o r t h e sh a r e d f o l d e r s o f W i n - dows. This chapter explains the preparatio n for sending file by Scan to Folder, various display screens, procedures for sending, and how to chec k the sending result when thi[...]
-
Page 988
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 60 5 Scan to Folder Screen The screen when using the machine for Scan to Folder is as shown. 1. Destination field The selected destination is shown here. If multiple destinations are selected, the destinations are displayed in the order they were selected by pressing [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next ] . Note r Pressing th[...]
-
Page 989
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 61 5 Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder Procedure for Sending by Scan to Folder Scan file is sent after specifying scan settings and destinations. A Press the { Scanner } key. B If user codes are set, enter a user code with the nu mber keys, and then press the { # } key. The Scanner Function screen ap- pears. Re[...]
-
Page 990
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 62 5 E If the network delivery scanner screen appears, switch to the screen for Scan to Folder. A Press [] . B Press [ Switch Destination List ] . C Press [ E-mail ] . D Press [ Exit ] . The E-mail screen appears. E Press [] . The Scan to Folder screen ap- pears. F Specify the destination folder. To specify the d[...]
-
Page 991
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 63 5 Using a registration number to select a dest ination folder A Press [ Registration No. ] . B Use the number keys to enter the five-digit registration number that has been assigned to a destination folder. If the entered number is less than five digits long, press the { # } key after the last number. Example:[...]
-
Page 992
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 64 5 I If entering a password to log on is required, press [ Manual In- put ] on the right side of the password field. The soft keyboard is displayed for entering a password. J Enter a password. K Press [ OK ] . L Press [ Connection Test ] . A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exi[...]
-
Page 993
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 65 5 G Press [ Manual Input ] on the right side of the path field. The soft keyboard is displayed for entering the path fo r the folder. H Enter the path for the folder. Note r This is an example of enter- ing a pass to send to the sub- folder “lib” in the folder “us- er”. userlib Reference For informati[...]
-
Page 994
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 66 5 Searching to select a destination folder from the network A Press [ Enter Destination ] . B Press [ SMB ] . C Press [ Browse Netw ork ] on the right side of the path field. The client computers list on the same network appears. Note r Workgroup names or do- main names must be set properly to browse the net- [...]
-
Page 995
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 67 5 Searching to select a destination folder from the Destination List A Press [] . B Press [ Search by Dest. Name ] . The soft keyboard is displayed for entering a user name. C Enter part of the destination folder name. Note r Enter the first characte r or characters of the destination name. r It is necessary t[...]
-
Page 996
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 68 5 Note r The scan file is given a 21-dig- it (except the extension) file name which combines the time and date of scanning originals with a 4-digit page number. (Example : When one page is scanned in TIFF at 15.10 seconds, 3.30 p.m., 3 1 December, 2003, the file name is 200312311530150100 001.tif) D Press [ OK[...]
-
Page 997
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 69 5 If the entered number is less than five digits long, press the { # } key after the last number. Example: To enter 00002 Press the { 2 } key, and then press the { # } key. Note r When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code appears after selecting the sender. En- ter the prot[...]
-
Page 998
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 70 5 J Press the { Start } key. Note r To interrupt scanning, press the { Clear/Stop } key or press [ Stop ] on the screen. r When using the Batch function or the SADF function, place the next original after the others have been scanned. See p.42 “Scanning Originals in Several Times”. r A file beyond 2000 MB [...]
-
Page 999
Checking the Status of Scan to Folder 71 5 Checking the Status of Scan to Folder The status of the last 100 sendings can be checked. For every new sendin g record after 100, the oldest record is deleted. Note r When [ Print & Delete Sc anner Jour- nal ] is set to [ Delete all after printing ] , the whole journal is printed when the number of re[...]
-
Page 1000
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder 72 5[...]
-
Page 1001
73 6. Using the Document Server Function S c a n f i l e o b t a i n e d b y s c a n n i n g o r i g i n a l s c a n b e s t or e d in t h e h a r d d i s k o f t h e m a - chine using the Document Server, and the stored file can be used later . Using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professi onal, stored file can be viewed, retrieved, or de- leted with a cli[...]
-
Page 1002
Using the Document Server Function 74 6 Storage Procedure Scan and store the file in the Docu- ment Server. A Press the { Scanner } key. B If the user codes are set, enter a user code with the number keys, and then press the { # } key. The Scanner Function screen ap- pears. Reference For information about the user codes, see General Settings Guide [...]
-
Page 1003
Storing Files 75 6 B Press [ Store Only ] . Note r To store and deliver scan files, pres s [ Send & Store ] . See p.57 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail”, p.70 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder”, or p.93 “Simultaneous Stor- age and Delivery”. r [ Store Only ] cannot be pressed if even a single destination[...]
-
Page 1004
Using the Document Server Function 76 6 B Select the user name. Note r The user names shown here are names that were pro- gramed on the Key Operator Tools tab in System Settings. To enter a name not shown here, press [ Non-programed Name ] , and then enter the user name. C Press [ OK ] . Specifying a file name Scan files are automatically named SCA[...]
-
Page 1005
Viewing a List of Stored Files 77 6 Viewing a List of Stored Files From the list of stored files, you can delete the files st ored in the Docu- ment Server or change the file infor- mation. To show the list of stored files, perform the following steps: A Press the { Scanner } key. B If user codes are set, enter a user code using the number keys, an[...]
-
Page 1006
Using the Document Server Function 78 6 Viewing the List The list of stored files has the foll owing elements. v When using the network delivery scanner function, e-mail, or Scan to Folder v When displaying information of a selected stored file 1. Keys for searching files Switch to the screens for searching for a file by user name or file name, or [...]
-
Page 1007
Viewing a List of Stored Files 79 6 6. [ Manage/Delete File ] Press to manage or delete files stored in the Document Se r v e r o r t o c h a n g e file information etc.. 7. [ Send ] Press to send or deliver files stored in the Document Server. For more infor- mation, see p.81 “Sending Stored Files by E-mail or Scan to Folder, or Deliv- ering”.[...]
-
Page 1008
Using the Document Server Function 80 6 Searching for Files You can search for files from the stored files using the user name or file name. Searching by user name A On the screen with the list of stored files, press [ Search by User Name ] . B Select the user name to be used for the search. Note r The user names shown here are names that were regi[...]
-
Page 1009
Viewing a List of Stored Files 81 6 Sending Stored Files by E-mail or Scan to Folder, or Delivering Files stored in the Document Server ca n be se nt by e -m ai l or Sc an to F ol d- er, or delivered to the delivery server. Note r This section expl ains how to se lect files to be sent or delivered. For more informat ion about sendin g by e-mail, se[...]
-
Page 1010
Using the Document Server Function 82 6 Managing Stored Files - Displaying and Downloading Stored Files Using a Web Browser Using a Web browser in a client com- puter, you can display or download the files in the Document Server. When http:// (machine IP address) / is entered in the address bar of the Web browser in a client computer, the Stored Fi[...]
-
Page 1011
Managing Stored Files 83 6 Changing File Information The information about files stored in the Document Server (user name, file name, and password) can be changed. Limitation r Information about files waiting for delivery cannot be changed. Reference Using a Web browser (See General Settings Guide ) from a client com- puter, you can change the info[...]
-
Page 1012
Using the Document Server Function 84 6 Changing the file name A Press [ Change File Name ] . The soft keyboard is displayed for changing the file name. B Enter the new file name. Reference For information about how to enter characters, se e Gener- al Settings Guide . C Press [ OK ] . Changing the password A Press [ Change Passwor d ] . B Enter a n[...]
-
Page 1013
85 7. Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function Scan file can be sent to a specified de stination using the ne twork delivery scan- ner function. This chapter explains th e preparation sequence, various display screens, delivery procedures, and how to check the delivery result when this function i s used. Important r A delivery server in which Sc[...]
-
Page 1014
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 86 7 Network Delivery Scanner Screen The screen whe n using the machine as a network deliv ery scanner is as sh own. 1. Network delivery scanner icon () Shows that the screen for network deliv- ery scanner function is displayed. 2. Destination field The selected destination is shown here. If multiple dest[...]
-
Page 1015
Delivering Scan File 87 7 Delivering Scan File Delivery Procedure Scan file is delivered after scan set- tings and destinations are specified. If necessary, you can select a sender and a subject. A Press the { Scanner } key. B If user codes are set, enter a user code with the nu mber keys, and then press the { # } key. The Scanner Function screen a[...]
-
Page 1016
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 88 7 B Press [ Switch Destination List ] . C Press [ Delivery Server ] . D Press [ Exit ] . The Network Delivery Scanner screen appears. F Specify the destination. To specify a dest ination, you ca n select it from the list, specifying a registration number, select it after search for it, or directly ente[...]
-
Page 1017
Delivering Scan File 89 7 Example: To enter 00009 Press the { 9 } key, and then press the { # } key. C To select more destinations, re- peat step B . Note r To deselect a destination, press [ U Prev. ] or [ T Next ] to display the destination in the destination field, and then press the { Clear/Stop } key. Searching to select a destination A Press [...]
-
Page 1018
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 90 7 B Enter the destination. Note r Enter the e-mail address of the destination when send- ing via the delivery server. r It is possible to use letters, numbers, and periods. The symbols (),;:” cannot be used. Reference For information about how to enter characters, se e Gener- al Settings Guide . C P[...]
-
Page 1019
Delivering Scan File 91 7 r When [ Return Receipt ] is se- lected, an e-mail notifying that the file has been re ad by the destination party is sent to the sender selected here. To use [ Return Receipt ] , it is necessary to make settings such as the e-mail address in advance in ScanRouter V2 Professional. C Press [ OK ] . Using a registration numb[...]
-
Page 1020
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 92 7 C Press [ User (Dest.) Name ] . The soft keyboard is displayed for entering a sender name. D Enter part of the sender name. Note r Enter the first characte r or characters of the sender name. r It is necessary to differentiate between capital and small letters. Reference For information about how to [...]
-
Page 1021
Delivering Scan File 93 7 I Press the { Start } key. Note r To interrupt scanning, press the { Clear/Stop } key or [ Stop ] on the screen. r When using the SADF or Batch function, place th e next original after the others have been scanned. See p.42 “Scanning Originals in Several Times”. Simultaneous Storage and Delivery You can use the network[...]
-
Page 1022
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 94 7 Checking the Status of Delivery The status of the last 100 deliveries can be checked. For every new deliv- ery record after 100, the oldest record is deleted. Note r When [ Print & Delete Sc anner Jour- nal ] is set to [ Delete all after printing ] , the whole journal is printed when the number o[...]
-
Page 1023
95 8. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function This chapter descri bes the operations fo r scanning originals with the network TWAIN scanner using DeskTopBinder V2 Li te. In addition, the preparation for using the network TWAIN scanner and some functions of the TWAIN driv er are introduce d. Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN Scanner To use th[...]
-
Page 1024
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 96 8 Scanning Originals This section explains how to scan originals using the n etwork TWAIN scanner function. A Start DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, and then select the scanner driver. A On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Program ] , point to [ DeskTop- Binder V2 ] , and then click [ Desk- TopBinder V2 ] . B Click [[...]
-
Page 1025
Scanning Originals 97 8 Note r For advanced settings, click [ Detail ] to display the Detail window. For information about the Detail window , see TWAIN driver Help. C According to the settings of [ Document: ] and [ Orientation: ] , change the other setting of the [ Document ] group. Reference p.41 “For a Netwo rk TWAIN Scanner” For informatio[...]
-
Page 1026
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 98 8 Functions of the TWAIN Driver The following is an introduction to the various functions of the TWAIN driver: Reference For more information about these functions or other functions, see TWAIN driver Help. v Automatic Tilt Correction This function automatically cor- rects character string s that were sca[...]
-
Page 1027
99 9. Appendix Relationship between Resolution and File Size Resolution and scan area are inversel y re lated. The higher the resolution is se t, the smaller the area that can be scanne d. Conversely, the larger the scan area , the lower the resolution that can be set. The relationship between the scanning reso lution and the file size is shown be-[...]
-
Page 1028
Appendix 100 9 *1 The scanning size must be manually entered. When Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner Reference To specify the scanning area or resolu tion when using the machine as a net- work TWAIN scanner, see TWAIN driver Hel p. v When Binary or Halftone is se lected as the Colors/ Gradations The originals can be scanned us ing combinat ions mark[...]
-
Page 1029
Relationship between Resolution and File Size 101 9 v When Gray Scale is selected as the Colors/ Gradations The originals can be scanned us ing combinat ions marked with m in the table (Original orientation: S ). *1 The scanning size must be manually entered. 100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 500 dpi 600 dpi 700 dpi 800 dpi 900 dpi 1000 dpi 1100 dpi [...]
-
Page 1030
Appendix 102 9 Relationship between File Type Specified and File Type Used When Sending E-mail The relationship between the file ty pe sp ecified when scanning originals and the file type converted into when sending e-mail or storing f ile s is shown below by scan type. *1 When Gray Scale is used, the file format is converted to JPE G when [ Standa[...]
-
Page 1031
Max. Number of Addresses Which Can Be Specified and Files Which Can Be Stored 103 9 Max. Number of Addr esses Which Can Be Specified and Files Which Can Be Stored *1 There is a limitation to the number of addr esses to specify in the following 1-4 case. A The number of addresses to ente r directly for send ing e-mail: 65 B The number of addresses t[...]
-
Page 1032
Appendix 104 9 Troubleshooting This section contains ad vice on what to d o i f y o u h a v e p r oblems scanning an original, or if the network delivery sca nner or e-mail function does not work. Various messages that may appear on th e control panel or client computer are listed, along with ca uses and solution s. When Scanning Is Not Performed a[...]
-
Page 1033
Troubleshooting 105 9 When an Error Message Appe ars on the Control Panel Note r If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the ma i n p ow er s wi t ch of t he ma c hi ne , an d th en tu r n i t on ag a in . If t he me s sa ge still appears, note the cont ent of the message and the error number (if listed in the tab[...]
-
Page 1034
Appendix 106 9 Captured file exceeded max. number of pages per file. Cannot send the scanned data. The maximum number of pages which can be stored as a single file is 1000. Reduce the number of pages and send them again. Connection with LDAP server has failed. Check the server status. A network error has occurr ed and connection has failed. Try the[...]
-
Page 1035
Troubleshooting 107 9 Exceeded max. number of alphanumeric characters for the path. The maximum number of characters which can be entered for path is 128. Check the number of character you entered, and then en ter it again. Exceeded max. number of files which can be sent at the same time. Reduce the number of the selected files. The number of files[...]
-
Page 1036
Appendix 108 9 Memory is full. Cannot scan. The scanned data will be deleted. Because of insufficient hard disk space, the first page could not be scanned. Try one of the following measures: • Wait for a while, and then retry the scan operation. • Reduce the scan area or scanning resolution. • D elete unneeded stored files. Memory is full. Pr[...]
-
Page 1037
Troubleshooting 109 9 Selected file is currently in use. Cannot change user name. The user name of a file that is being edited with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional or that is waiting for delivery cannot be changed. Try the operation again after editing is finished or delivery is canceled. Selected file is currently in use. Cannot delete it. A fi[...]
-
Page 1038
Appendix 110 9 When an Error Message Appear s on the Client Computer This section describes the main possible causes and actions for error messages displayed on the client computer when the TWAIN driver is used. Note r If an error message that is not containe d in this section appears, turn off the ma i n p ow er s wi t ch of t he ma c hi ne , an d[...]
-
Page 1039
Troubleshooting 111 9 [ Cannot find the scanner. Check if the scanner main power is on. ] • Chec k whether the main power switch of the machine is turned off . • Check whether the machine is c onnect- ed to the network correctly. • Deselect the personal firewall function of the client computers. [ Cannot specify any more scanning area. ] The [...]
-
Page 1040
Appendix 112 9 [ Invalid Winsock version. Please use versio n 1.1 or high- er. ] Install the operating system of the compu- ter or copy Winsock from the operating system CD-ROM. [ No response from the scann er. ] • Check whether the machine is connect- ed to the network correctly. • The network is cr owded. Wait for a while, and then try to rec[...]
-
Page 1041
Specifications 113 9 Specifications Scan method Flatbed scanning Scan speed • E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network Delivery Scanner 51 pages/minute [Scan size: A4 R , Scan type: Text (Print), Resolution: 200 dpi, Compression (Black & White): On (MH)] • TWAIN Scanner 46 pages/minute [Size: A4 R , Mode: Standard, Resolu- tion: 200 dpi, Compression ([...]
-
Page 1042
114 INDEX A Automatic Tilt Correction , 98 Auto run program , 25 C Checking t he status of deliver y , 94 { Check Modes } key , 8 { Clear Modes } key , 8 { Clear/Stop } key , 9 Compression (Black & White) , 21 Compression (Gray Scale) , 21 D Default Scan Settings , 16 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite , 29 , 31 , 95 Destination List Display Priority 1 , 20[...]
-
Page 1043
115 R Relationship be tween File Type Specified and File Type Used When Sending E-mail , 102 Relationship between resolution and file size , 99 Resolution , 16 S Save , 97 Scanner Features , 13 Scanning mode registration , 98 Scanning originals , 96 Scanning Originals in S everal Times , 42 ScanRouter V2 Lite , 32 Scan Settings , 13 , 16 Scan size [...]
-
Page 1044
116 EN USA B654-8707[...]